Approved by: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F:-008-W-C-019840-RI-80 

"tj,(:~,: .. i. f·f. 

. ThiS. id11;eument contains 126 

clas~,ff.ied sheets including 

the, front and back cover. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC SYSTEM REFERENCE HANDBOOK 

FOR 

GAMBIT RECONNAISSANCE SYSTEM 

WITH 

EXTENDED ALTITUDE CAPABILITY 

(EAC) 

VOLUME 3 

Prepared by 

BIF-008 

Under Contract 

l July 1980 

"WARNING -THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BE USED AS A SOURCE FOR DERIVATIVE CLASSIFICATION .. 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

. Handle via BYEMAH 

Control System Only 

25X1 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Orbit 

Coordinate 

System (OCS) 

#1 

Orbit 

Coordinate 

System (OCS) 

#2 

BIF-008 Uses OCS #1 

OCS #1 Is Used In This Document 

+Z 

Orbit Coordinate Systems Sign Convention 

FRONTISPIECE 

+Y 

Direction 

.... 

Of Flight 

"WARNING -THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BE USED AS A SOURCE FOR DERIVATIVE CLASSIFICATION" 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand! e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 

{_ 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008-W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

VOLUME 3 

PART 3 HARDWARE DESCRIPTIOK 

2.0 9x5 DUAL PLATE?\ CAMERA AND FILM HANDLING SUBSYSTEM 

2.1 

2.2 

2.3 

2.4 

2.5 

2.6 

2.7 

Film Handling Subsystem Description 

2.1.l 9 and 5 Supply Assemblies 

2.1. 2 9x5 Take-up Assemblies 

9x5 Dual Platen Camera Description 

2.2.1 

2.2.2 

Camera Housing 

9 and 5 Pivot Frame Assemblies 

Film Path Distances 

Operational Description 

2.4.1 Simplified Photographic Cycle 

2.4.2 Simplified Take-up Cycle 

9x5 Dual Platen Camera and Film Handling Subsystem Electronic Control Units 

2.5.1 

2.5.2 

2.5.3 

2.5.4 

Film Control Electronics 

Film Handling Electronics 

9 and 5 Frequency Phase Lock Loop 

Electronics 

9 and 5 Camera Electronics Assemblies 

9x5 Dual Platen Camera and Film Handling 

Subsystem Instrumentation 

Command Summary 

2.7.1 

2.7.2 

2.7.3 

2.7.4 

2.7.5 

CP Select Commands 

Operational Power Commands 

5 Parking Brake 

Film Drive Commands 

Take-up Control Commands 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

3.2-1 

3.2-1 

3.2-5 

3.2-29 

3.2-42 

3.2-45 

3.2-47 

3.2-71 

3.2-71 

3.2-77 

3.2-79 

3.2-84 

3.2-84 

3.2-93 

3.2-103 

3.2-113 

3.2-133 

3.2-157 

3.2-157 

3.2-158 

3.2-160 

3.2-162 

3.2-169 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System On! y 

,,, ·"'""' .. ·· .. , ,, 

1'.P . ··, 

i 

j ·,,_ .. ,, I . 

__. ,.-•' 

,, ..... -
VOLUME 3 

3.0 

4.0 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008-W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.7.6 

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

Variable Exposure Mechanism (Slit 

Mechanism) Commands 

2.7.7 Slant Range Compensation Commands 

2.7.8 Focus Adjustment (NPA) Commands 

OPTICAL SUBSYSTEM 

3.1 Optical Subsystem Configuration 

3.2 

3.3 

3.4 

Elements of the Optical Subsystem 

3.2.l 

3.2.2 

3.2.3 

Stereo Mirror 

Primary Mirror (Asphere) 

Ross Corrector and Field Lens Assembly 

Optical Performance Parameters 

3.3.l Aperture Obstructions and Vignetting 

3.3.2 Lens Spectral Transmittance 

Instrumentation 

MIRROR POSITIONING SUBSYSTEM 

4.1 Stereo Servo Subsystem 

4.2 

4.3 

4.1. l 

4.1.2 

Stereo Drive Components 

Stereo Servo Electronic Control 

4.1.3 Stereo Angle Instrumentation 

Crab Servo Subsystem 

4.2.1 Crab Drive Components 

4.2.2 

4.2.3 

Crab Servo Electronic Control 

Crab Angle Instrumentation 

Instrumentation Summary 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

3.2-172 

3.2-174 

3.2-177 

3. 3-1 

3.3-1 

3.3-5 

3.3-5 

3.3-10 

3. 3-11 

3. 3-11 

3.3-12 

3.3-15 

3.3-15 

3.4-1 

3.4-4 

3.4-4 

3.4-6 

3.4-13 

3.4-15 

3.4-18 

3.4-18 

3.4-25 

3.4-26 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
VOLUME 3 

4.4 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued} 

Mirror Positioning Command Summary 

4.4.l CP Select Commands 

4.4.2 14 V WORD Command 

4.4.3 13V WORD Command (13V2bWXYZ) 

4.4.4 Operational Power ON Commands 

4.4.5 Operational Power OFF Commands 

4.4.6 9/5 RUNOUT ON Command (MCS) 

4.4.7 Power OFF Commands (MCS) 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Page 

3.4-26 

3.4-26 

3.4-30 

3.4-31 

3.4-32 

3.4-33 

3.4-34 

3.4-34 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
VOLUME 3 

Figure 

3.2-1 

3.2-2 

3.2-3 

3.2-4 

3. 2. 5 

3.2-6 

3.2-7 

3.2-8 

3.2-9 

3.2-10 

3. 2-11 

3.2-12 

3.2-13 

3.2-14 

3.2-15 

3.2-16 

3.2-17 

3.2-18 

3.2-19 

3.2-20 

3.2-21 

3.2-22 

3.2-23 

3.2-24 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Al F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 

Title 

9x5 Dual Platen Camera and Film Handling Subsystem 

Block Diagram 

9x5 Camera and Film Handling Subsystem Major 

Components 

9 Supply and Looper Assembly Without Supply Spool 

5 Supply Assembly (Breadboard) 

9 Supply Spool Assembly 

5 Supply Spool Assembly 

9 and 5 Supply Assemblies 

9 and 5 Looper Carriage Assemblies and Instrumentation 

5 Supply Assembly (-Y View) 

9 and 5 Tension Arm Assemblies 

General Tension Arm Instrumentation Circuit 

General Tension Arm Instrumentation Output 

Film Velocity Sensor Conceptual Representation 

9 and 5 Film Quantity Sensor Assemblies 

9x5 Take-up Assembly (-Y View) 

9x5 Take-up Assembly (-Z View) 

9 Take-up Spool Assembly 

9 T/U Motor Performance Curves 

9 T/U Motor Speed-Torque Envelope 

5 Take-up Spool Assembly 

5 T/U Motor Performance Curves 

9x5 Dual Platen Camera Internal Configuration 

Camera Housing (Cover Removed) 

9 Pivot Frame Assembly 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

3.2-2 

3.2-3 

3.2-6 

3.2-7 

3.2-8 

3.2-10 

3.2-13 

3.2-15 

3.2-17 

3.2-19 

3.2-23 

3.2-24 

3.2-26 

3.2-27 

3.2-30 

3.2-31 

3.2-34 

3.2-35 

3.2-36 

3.2-37 

3.2-39 

3.2-43 

3.2-46 

3.2-48 

Hand! e v1 a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
VOLUME 3 

Figure 

3.2-25 

.3.2-26 

.3.2-27 

.3.2-28 

.3.2-29 

.3.2-30 

.3.2-31 

.3.2-.32 

.3.2-33 

.3.2-34 

.3.2-.35 

.3.2-.36 

.3. 2-.37 

.3.2-.38 

3.2-.39 

.3.2-40 

.3.2-41 

.3.2-42 

3.2-43 

3.2-44 

3.2-45 

3.2-46 

.3.2-47 

3.2-48 

3.2-49 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008-W-C-019840-RI-80 

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued) 

Title 

5 Pivot Frame Assembly 

9 Variable Exposure Mechanism 

9 Variable Exposure Mechanism 

5 Variable Exposure Mechanism 

Variable Exposure Mechanism Drive System Schematic 

9 Film Format 

5 Film Format 

9 and 5 Slit Blade Details 

9 and 5 Pivot Frame Assemblies 

Focus Adjust Mechanism Gearbox 

Focus Adjust Mechanism Gear Train 

PPS/DP EAC Film Path Distances 

Film Handling Operational Schematic 

Film Control Electronics Logic Diagram 

Clamp Circuit and Comparator Operation 

Film Tension vs Elapsed Time 

5 Film Handling Subsystem Logic Diagram 

FPLLE Subsystem Block Diagram 

FPLLE Block Diagram (Single Channel) 

CEA Subsystem Block Diagram 

SRC Block Diagram 

Primary NPA Block Diagram 

Backup NPA Block Diagram 

VEM Block Diagram (Channel A) 

Data Track and Interframe Marker Block Diagram 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Page 

3.2-49 

3.2-52 

3. 2- 54 

3.2-55 

3.2-58 

3.2-59 

3.2-60 

3.2-63 

3.2-66 

.3.2-68 

3. 2-69 

3.2-73 

3.2-76 

3.2-87 

.3.2- 92 

3.2- 94 

3. 2- 97 

3.2- 104 

3.2- 108 

3.2-115 

3.2-117 

3.2-123 

3.2-124 

3.2-128 

3.2-130 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

;~. 
VOLUME 3 

Figure 

3.3-1 

3.3-2 

3.3-3 

3.3-4 

3.4-1 

3.4-2 

3.4-3 

3.4-4 

3.4-5 

3.4-6 

3.4-7 

3.4-8 

3.4-9 

3.4-10 

3.4-11 

3.4-12 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008-W-C-019840-RI-80 

LIST OF ILLUSTR~TIO~S (Continued) 

Title 

Optical Configuration of the R-5 Lens and Stereo Mirror 

Stereo Mirror Vignetting 

Central and S-1 Sensor Vignetting 

Typical Spectral Transmittance, R-5 Optics (Unobstructed) 

Stereo Mirror Movements (Conceptual Presentation) 

Crab and Stereo Servos 

Stereo Servo and Drive 

Hypocycloid Drive Assembly 

Hypocycloid Drive (Conceptual Representation) 

Typical Position - Time Curve for Stereo Mirror 

with Hypocycloid Drive 

Stereo Servo Subsystem Electrical Block Diagram 

Stereo and Crab Servo Instrumentation 

Stereo Mirror Servos and Instrumentation 

Crab Hysteresis Effect 

Crab Servo 

Crab Servo Subsystem Electrical Block Diagram 

3.3-3 

3.3-13 

3.3-14 

3.3-16 

3.4-2 

3.4-3 

3.4-5 

3.4-7 

3.4-8 

3.4-9 

3.4-10 

3.4-14 

3.4-16 

3.4-17 

3.4-19 

3.4-21 

Handle via BYEMAN 

CDntrol System Only 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 
VOLUME 3 

Table 

3.2-1 

3.2-2 

3.2-3 

3.2-4 

3. 2-5 

3.2-6 

3.3-1 

3.3-2 

3.3-3 

3.3-4 

3.3-5 

3.3-6 

3.4-1 

3.4-2 

3.4-3 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008-W-C-019840-RI-80 

LIST OF TABLES 

Title 

Tension Arm Instrumentation Data 

9 and 5 Take-up Spools Data Summary 

Operational Slit Widths 

Film Path Lengths 

Film Handling Subsystem Instrumentation: 9 and 5 

9x5 Dual Platen Camera Instrumentation 

R-5 Optical Formula 

R-5 Refractive Indices 

Optical System Physical Characteristics Summary 

Optical Properties Summary 

Percent Obstruction (Vignetting) 

Optical Subsystem Instrumentation 

Stereo Position vs Executed Command Bit State 

Crab Position vs Command Bit State 

Mirror Positioning Instrumentation Summary 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

3. 2- 25 

3. 2- 32 

3.2- 56 

3.2-75 

3.2-134 

3. 2-146 

3.3-6 

3.3-7 

3.3-8 

3.3-9 

3.3-15 

3.3-17 

3.4-12 

3.4-24 

3.4-27 

Hand I e v1 a BY EMAH 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

TO~ 

Bl F-008-W-C-019840-RI-80 

This page intentionally blank. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Cont ro 1 5 y stem On I y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.0 9 x 5 DUAL PLATEN CAMERA AND FILM HANDLING SUBSYSTEM 

The 9 x 5 dual platen camera and film handling subsystem provides the means 

to transfer and expose film in the PPS/DP EAC. The subsystem moves film from 

the supplies to the camera, records an image on the film, and then moves the 

exposed film to the take-up spools for later recovery. To simplify this 

section, the camera components and film-handling components will be discussed separately. 

Figure 3.2-1 presents an overall block diagram of the 9 x 5 camera and film 

handling subsystem. The locations of the camera and film handling components, excluding electrical boxes (see Part 3 Section 1) are shown in 

Figure 3.2-2. 

2.1 Film Handling Subsystem Description 

The following components comprise the 9 x 5 film handling subsystem: 

(1) two supply assemblies (9 and 5) 

(2) two 9 x 5 take-up mechanisms and their associated spools 

(3) two electronic control uni ts 

(4) film guidance and alignment devices 

The supply assemblies store unexposed film and supply film to the camera as 

needed. The assemblies also act to control film tension throughout the 

subsystem. 

The take-up assemblies (one in each SRV) store the exposed 9 and 5 films for 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand! e vi a BY EMAN 

Control Sys tern On l y 
Instrumentation 

Processor 

t 

Conunand 

Processor 

Power 

Monitor 

and Control 

Unit 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Film 

Control 

Electronics 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

1<1111-~~~~~~_9_S_u~p~p_l~y~~~~~~~~~--ll!l.lg 

Supply 

I 

E 

u 

9 S ool Drive 

Take-up 2 

Film Handling 

Electronics 

9 

FPL LE 

9 

Camera 

Electronics 

Assembly 

5 

FPLLE 

5 

Camera 

Electronics 

Assembly 

5 Supply 5 

Supply 

9 Platen Drive 

9x5 

Dual 

9 Variable Ex osure Mechanism Platen 

Camera 

9 Focus Adjust Mechanism 

9 Data Tracks and I/F Marks 

5 Variable Ex osure Mechanism 

5 Focus Ad·ust Mechanism 

5 Data Tracks and I/F Marks 

Figure 3.2-1. 9x5 Dual Platen Camera And Film Handling Subsystem 

Block Diagram 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

-fQP 5ecpET _G_ 

-·1 

-Z 

BIF-008 Vehicle 

Coordinates 

Hand I e vi a BYEMAN Control System Only 

Upper 

Travel Viewer Box 

Sta 25 

9 T/U 

Lower Travel 

Viewer Box 

C/S 3 

C/S 2 

Sta 4, 3 

C/S 4 TSRT 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Splicer Mechanism 

Arm 

-+----\----:f------------ni-=.:======~ Drive Roller, Velocity Sensor 

5 Splicer 

Mechanism 

Carriage 

Camera/Supply 

Tilt Frame Couplers 

5 Platen 

Drive Roller, 5 Velocity 

Sensor 

~5 Looper Carriage 

Tension Arm 1 

Sta 77.60 

Bolt Centerline 

Figure 3,2-2, 9x5 Camera and Film Handling Subsystem Major Components 

3.2-3/3.2-4 

..JQP 5EEll!T _G_ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

subsequent recovery and assist the supply assemblies in controlling film 

tension. 

The two electronic units (film control electronics (9) and film handling 

electronics (5)) control the transport of the film by the supply and takeup assemblies. 

The film guidance and alignment devices ensure smooth, damage-free movement of the film through the subsystem. 

2.1.1 9 and 5 Supply Assemblies 

Each supply assembly is held in a single framework, and consists of a supply 

spool assembly containing the film spool and spool drive, a looper assembly 

having a supply and take-up side with a free-running carriage between, a 

tension arm assembly, film transport and guiding devices, and associated instrumentation (see Figures 3.2-3 and 3.2-4). A splicer/cutter mechanism 

attaches to each supply frame, and guides the film to either take-up 1 or 

take-up 2. 

2.1.1.1 Supply Spool Assemblies. The supply spool assemblies are selfcontained units to which the film spools are mounted to facilitate changing. 

Each assembly can be removed from the main supply frame either before or 

after assembly into the supply and electronics module (SEM). 

2.1.1.1.1 9 Supply Spool Assembly. The 9 spool assembly, Figure 3.2-5, 

consists of a fixed spool-support spindle and a rotating spindle which form 

a frameless de torque motor driving the supply spool. Two redundant coil 

electromechanical brakes connect to the rotating spindle through a single 

gear train. The spool mounts on the rotating spindle and has a 6-inch diameter core with 20.25-inch outside diameter flanges. The maximum capacity 

of the 9 ·supply spool is 12,241 feet of 0.002-inch thick film or equivalent 

G -

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Tension Arm 

Main Supply Sp 

Mounting Pads 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008-_W-C-019840-RI-80 

Gui dance Package Assembly 

+Z 

+Y 

+X 

BIF-008 Vehicle 

Coordinates 

Looper Carriage 

Quantity Sensor 

Assembly 

Lower Support 

Structure 

Separation Point 

(4 Places) 

Figure 3.2-3. 9 Supply and Looper Assembly Without Supply Spool 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

(',on t ro l Sys tern On l y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

Vl 

. 

N 

I 

'-.] 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

G 

BIF-008 

Vehicle 

Coordinates 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TOP SECRET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Note: 

Core = 6 inches in diameter 

Spool = 20.25 inches OD 

Frameless de 

Torque Motor 

Spindle 

Rotating Spindle 

1.25" Dia. Gear 

( 40 Teeth) 

--·-

Bl F-008...l W-C-019840-RI-80 

+Y 

BIF-008 Vehicle 

Coordinates 

Fixed Spindle 

Motor Retainer 

Flanges 

Ring Gear 6" Dia. 

(200 Teeth) 

Fixed Spindle 

Teeth) 2.75" Dia . 

.____.__Electromechanical Brakes 

(24 Teeth) 0.7511 Dia. 

All Gears: 10 Teeth/in. of Circumference Gear Ratio: 18: 1 

Figure 3.2-5. 9 Supply Spool Assembly 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

(10,800 feet of operational film, the remaining capacity available for storing test fi Im). 

The supply spool drive, consisting of the fixed and rotating spindles and 

the mechanical brakes, is powered through the film control electronics. The 

fixed spindle contains the stator portion of the motor and supports the dual 

brake assembly and its gear train. The rotating spindle is supported on 

the fixed spindle by ball bearings. The armature of the torque motor is 

fastened to the rotating spindle together with a ring gear which meshes with 

the brake gearing. 

The supply motor accelerates or decelerates the supply spool to maintain 

constant film tension, excluding minor tension transients, over the entire 

range of film spool inertias. The supply spool is stopped by a combination 

of supply motor power reversal and, if necessary, application of the brakes. 

(Brakes are needed only for deceleration with a large supply spool inertia.) 

The two brakes, which are normally engaged, connect to the spindle through 

an 18:1 gear reduction, yielding a minimum braking torque of approximately 

19 foot-pounds. The brakes act as holding brakes during all inactive periods of the mission, including launch and orbit adjusts. The brakes are 

mechanically connected in parallel and are disengaged simultaneously during 

normal take-up operations. Each brake assembly incorporates two actuating 

coils, either of which is capable of disengaging that brake. The coils are 

connected into the control circuitry in such a manner that a failure of any 

one coil or its actuating circuit will not result in a failure to disengage both brakes. 

2.1.1.1.2 5 Supply Spool Assembly. The 5 spool assembly, shown in Figure 

3.2-6, consists of a spindle supporting a 3.00-inch diameter spool core with 

11.0-inch outside diameter flanges, driven by a de torque motor through a 

spur gear attached to the spindle. The dual coil electromechanical brake 

_G_ 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand! e vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Note: 

Core 

Spool 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

3.00 inches diameter 

11.0 inches OD 

Brake Gear, 

Spool (63 teeth) 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

+Y 

BIF-008 Vehicle 

Coordinates 

~Electromechanical Brake 

Brake Gear (18 teeth) 

DC Torque Motor 

Flanges 

Core 

Drive Gear (37 teeth) 

Spindle 

Shaft Drive Gear 

(106 teeth) 

Figure 3.2-6. 5 Supply Spool Assembly 

3.2-10 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

connects to the supply drive through a spur gear attached to the motor shaft. 

The maximum capacity of the spool is 3,665 feet of 0.002-inch thick film or 

equivalent, with 3,000 feet of operational film and the balance of the spool 

capacity available for storing test film. 

The 5 supply drive is similar to the 9 drive except that the motor is mounted 

to the side of the supply frame and is a self-contained unit. As in the 9 

system, the torque motor is used to drive the supply spool in the forward 

direction, and to provide reverse torque for stopping or slowing forward 

rotation of the spool. 

The drive uses the electromechanical brake to prevent spool movement during 

periods of nonoperation. The brake is normally engaged and requires power 

to either of its two coils to release. When fully engaged, the brake provides approximately 3 foot-pounds of braking torque at the supply spool. During normal operation the brake aids the supply motor dynamic braking in deceleration of the supply spool. 

During launch the brake is assisted by application of a small reverse current to the drive motor through a separately dedicated circuit. Referred 

to as the 5 parking brake function, the additional holding force provided 

is necessary to prevent spool rotation due to launch vibration. 

2.1.1.2 Frame and Looper Assemblies. The 9 and 5 frame and looper assemblies 

are functionally identical. Therefore, the following discussion may be 

applied to either. 

The frame and looper assembly is a rigid-frame structure supporting all other 

supply subassemblies, including a full film load and a splicer mechanism. The 

frame includes the looper carriage and other fixed rollers as an integral part 

of the assembly. 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EM AN 

C:Ontrol System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

The looper system is composed of two film storage locations (supply side and 

take-up side) connected by a free-moving carriage. The action of the looper 

carriage within its frame enables the camera to withdraw film from one side 

of the looper and return it to the other, up to the design capacity of the 

looper, without supply spool or take-up spool operation. Figure 3.2-7 shows the 

looper system, with the rollers which orient and direct the film from the 

supplies through the camera and onto the take-ups. 

The carriage assembly (Figure 3.2-8) consists of six rollers mounted to a truck 

which is free to slide back and forth on two longitudinal rods. Because there 

is no force exerted on the truck except by film tension, the position of the 

carriage is determined solely by the quantity of film in both sides of the 

storage looper. A decrease in the quantity of film in the take-up side of the 

looper is accompanied by an equal increase in quantity on the supply side of 

the looper. The resultant carriage translation drives a spiral roller cam by 

means of a post on the carriage. The cam rotates the shafts of two positionindicating potentiometers used for instrumentation, and also drives encoders, 

Sl and S2, generating the "empty" and "full" electrical limit feedback signals 

used to control film handling. The 9 and 5 supply encoders also generate the 

CAMERA AUTOMATIC OFF signals used by the CP to automatically turn off the camera 

in case an "OFF" command from the interface is not present. Figure 3.2-9 is a 

photograph of the 5 supply showing the carriage and spiral cam. 

The film capacity of the 9 and 5 loopers between mechanical stops is 60.0 and 

45.0 inches respectively, and 36.8 inches between electrical stops for both. 

The electrical range is not centered within the mechanical range. i~1en the 9 

carriage moves so as to empty the take-up side, the electrical trip point (supply 

looper full) occurs with 17.45 inches of film remaining before contact with the 

mechanical stop. When the carriage moves so as to fill the take-up side, the 

electrical trip point (supply looper empty) occurs with 54.25 inches of film in 

the looper (54.25 - 17.45 = 36.8 inches). The corresponding points for the 5 

looper carriage are 6.5 and 43.3 inches respectively. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EMAN 

Cont ro I System On I y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

(.N 

N 

I 

,__.. 

(.N 

TO SRV NO. 

TO SRV NO. 2 

G 

--

-----/ / 

AH 8ACKuP~/ CUT1ER 

TO SRV NO i -------fil_ 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

STA 

INTERFACE 

Figure 3. 2 - 7. 9 and 5 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

;; 

? ?.60 

CENTER~INE) 

Ci:OLL~t; FOR 

ASS[MBLY 

-9 S'JPPLY ASSE~.tB~Y 1 

FqAME COU:JLEqS 

TO CAMERA 

:'.: S~.P?,._v ASSEMBLY TiLT 

F~Atv1f CGJPd:-RS 

ROLLE" FOR 

VELOCllY SENSOR 

~OTE: 

ASSEMBLY 

Assemblies 

tZ 

I 

-x--- ---------.-x 

-z 81.F-Q,)8 VEi-iiCc..E CJORJINATES 

IO P SECRiT G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

. BI F-008- W-C- 019840-RI- 80 

This page intentionally left blank. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand! e v1 a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

I VI" :StCRt I ...L 

r-MECHANICAL STOPS 

\ 

SUPPLY SIDE EMPTY-9 

SUPPLY SiDE FULL-5 

\ (4 PLACES) \ /,/-) ~.~; ,, __ , 1'--._-< // 

() // 

MECHANICAL s_TOPS---------.... SUPPLY SIDE fULL-9 -.-... 

SUPPLY SIDE EM Pl Y-5 

(4 PLftLES} 

/ ~~· I /,,.--MDU~TED TO SUPPLY STRUCTURE 

SUPPORT SH.LI.FT----------... .... -......_ / , ,,/ 

-------y / , // / I / / / 

/ // ~ _,/' ~. //. y . // .. 1 

~ ( rSPIRAL ~~~, rn DRIVER 

/ <! '-_y' ~. ) I 

""~ 

~~ . 

i (' '"-..,~ I I ~/ / ~~ "~~ ~ ~ /) / 7/~ / s~~~~ "~~/;?ii / /~ / A~: ~' ~~ ////) /~- • "" ""'-~ / / 1 ~SUPPORT SHAF< 

~ / /"'-~/ r 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

ENCODER,Sl,SUPPLY S!OE EMPTY-9 

AND AUTOMATIC CAMERA OFF LOGIC SIGNALS 

FLEXIBLE COUPLING 

(4 PLACES) 

ENCODER SI PROVIDES LOGIC SIGNALS TD FILM HANDLING 

ELECTRONICS AND AUTOMATIC CAMERA OFF LOGIC SIGNALS f :/ 

~ FULL-9 - -------

POT, R2. IMP 5014. LOOPER POSITION (9)--... __ ___ 

~ '-._~/ // 

rS~~ w:~~b MOUNTED TD SUPPLY STRUCTURE / // ~/// ~ NOTE: 

THE 9 AN05 STORAGE !.DOPERS, ALTl-IDUGH DIFFERING 

IN SIZE, ARE FUNCTIONALLY SIMILAR.AND ARE 

THEREFORE REPRESENTED BY A SINGLE FIGURE. 

Hand I e vi a BY EM AH 

Control System Only 

\ v I . ~/- ·./,...~\ 

') ,) ~ I . 1. 

' I ·(-/ //....__ ;) 

I ~/ / l~>\I -./ ~, -------------~-MOUNTED TO SUPPLY STRUCTURE 

POTENTIOMETER JMP 5068 

LOOPER POSITION (5) 

- POTE NT iJME TER IMP 5069 

LOOPER POSITION (5) 

Figure 3,2-8. 9 and 5 Looper Carriage Assemblies and Instnimentation 

5 STORAGE LOOPER 

INSTRUMENTAT!QN 

3,2-15/3.2-16 

-X ">+< J -Y 

-z 

BAND 5 LOOPER AXE.:; 

SHOWN IN BIF-008 VEHICLE COORDINATES 

I vr ..,C\...Kll:I _G_ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

w 

. 

N 

I 

__. 

-....J 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

Figure 3.2-9. 5 Supply Assembly (-Y View) 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

+Z 

BIF-008 Vehicle. 

TAP c;;,FrDF=f G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.1.1.3 9 and 5 Tension Arm Assemblies. The 9 and 5 tension arm assemblies 

(Figure 3.2-10) are functionally similar and will be treated here together, 

with minor differences identified. 

The tension arm assembly consists of a roller attached to a pivoting arm on 

the looper assembly, plus an encoder and two concentric potentiometers driven 

by the arm shaft. 

(Text continued on page 3.2-20) 

3.2-18 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System On! y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TO 

(..,'l 

. 

N 

I 

....... 

I.Cl 

Handle 11i a BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

i---

/ 

,,JJ[ME">LY 3.2-10. 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

9 and 5 Tension Arm Assemblies 

~ J)77 

,i 11 ~j ~ POT£NT10M£TEP PROV10£S 

POS!TlON CONTROL SIGhAL 1(1 

FILM HANDLING ELECTRONICS 

TA p ca·rDl"'T G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

The tension arm acts as a limited film supply to absorb temporary mismatches 

in supply/receiver rates. A torsion spring attached to the pivoting arm 

maintains a tension of 3.0 ± 0.25 pounds for the 9 subsystem and 1.5 ± 0.25 

pounds for the S subsystem throughout the physical capacity of the tension 

looper. 

The 9 tension arm has a radius of 5.0 inches with a 60-degree travel between 

mechanical stops giving a maximum film capacity of 9.6 inches. The S tension 

arm is 5.0 inches in radius with a SS-degree travel between stops, resulting 

in a maximum film capacity of 9.4 inches. 

The tension arm encoder and four potentiometers are connected to the arm 

shaft as shown in Figure 3.2-10. The 9 encoder has four tracks which provide 

the Full, Near Full, Approaching Full, and Empty logic signals to the film 

control electronics (9). Additional tracks yield high and low tension signals 

used in conjunction with an instrumentation potentiometer. The quantity of 

film in the 9 tension looper at the encoder electrical Full position is 8.7 

inches, at the Near Full position is 8.2* inches, at the Approaching Full 

position is 4.55 inches, and at the electrical Empty position is 0.3 inch. 

The S encoder has three tracks which provide the Full, Approaching Full, and 

Empty logic signals to the film handling electronics (5). Additional tracks 

yield high and low tension signals used in conjunction with an instrumentation potentiometer. The quantity of film in the S tension looper at the 

encoder electrical Full position is 8.8 inches, at the electrical Empty 

position is 1.3 inches, and at the electrical Approaching Full position 

is approximately 6. 7 inches. 

The four potentiometers actually consist of two ganged dual cup potentiometers; 

one having the element of both cups made of infinite resolution conductive 

plastic and the other having the element of both cups wirewound. The two 

* 8.2 inches is true for OM-50 only. 

For FM-51 and on, this number is 6.3 inches. 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control Sy5tem On\ y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

potentiometers are directly connected with the same gear ratio to the tension 

arm. The shafts of the two potentiometers are synchronized. The wiper of one 

cup of the conductive plastic potentiometer is connected to the wiper of one 

cup of the wirewound potentiometer. This common wiper supplies the appropriate 

control electronics with a voltage (error signal) proportional to the amount 

of film stored in the tension looper. This paralleling of wipers provides 

redundancy for the error signal so that an open wiper or element in either 

potentiometer will not result in the loss of the error signal. 

The other cup of the conductive plastic potentiometer in conjunction with the 

encoder provides a linear voltage output proportional to the tension arm position with discontinuous voltage jumps at the electrical Full and Empty positions. 

The other cup of the wirewound potentiometer provides a redundant linear voltage 

output without the discontinuous voltage jumps at the tension arm extremes. 

Both of these instrumentation signals are used for vehicle telemetry (refer to 

Section 2.1.1.6). 

2.1.1.4 Supply Guidance and Compensating Devices. The following discussion 

refers to Figure 3.2-7. 

2.1.1.4.1 Tilt-Frame Couplers. Tilt-frame couplers are included in both 

systems (9 and 5) to ensure correct tracking of the film from the looper 

assembly to the camera and from the camera back to the looper. The tilt-frame 

couplers are supported by the supply frames and the camera housing cover, and 

are self-adjusting for all lateral and rotational displacement which might 

occur between the supplies and the camera. The couplers overcome component 

displacements by allowing the film strands between the supply and camera to 

undergo neutral axis twists. A manual adjustment capability between the supply 

and camera portions of the tilt-frame couplers allows for accurate lateral 

positioning of the film relative to the camera platen. The coupler assemblies also contain an internal damping frame on the input roller leading 

3.2-21 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System On I y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

to the camera, which helps to isolate film handling disturbances that might 

otherwise affect performance of the camera. The design of the 9 and 5 couplers 

are similar except for lengths and roller dimensions. 

2.1.1.4.2 Splicer Mechanism/Supply Alignment. Each supply frame incorporates 

a four-pad mounting surface for a splicer mechanism. The mounting can be 

adjusted to control Y-axis alignment between the splicer and supply. An 

adjustable frame assembly within the supply structure, at the input side of 

the splicer mounting, can be used to provide small values of Y-axis translation in film tracking between the supply and splicer. 

2.1.1.4.3 Supply Assembly Output Alignment. The four output rollers guiding 

film from the supply assemblies toward the 9 x 5 take-up mechanisms are pivot 

rollers (pivoting about the longitudinal axis), which allow the film to undergo 

neutral axis twists to ensure correct tracking into the take-up mechanisms. 

The supplies also include a set of compensating rollers in the film path to 

take-up 2. These are spring-loaded so that at various tension levels the 

rollers will move to shorten or lengthen the film path to take-up 2. This 

movement compensates for the worst case increase in path lengths which could 

be caused by thermal expansion of the vehicle, and prevents excessive tension 

in the film leaders from take-up 2 to the splicer mechanisms. 

2.1.1.5 9 Supply Assembly Lower Support Structure. The lower support structure and main support structure of the 9 supply are tubular aluminum weldments. 

The lower structure includes three rollers which guide the 9.5-inch wide film 

strand around the supply spool from the carriage assembly to the splicer 

mechanism location (reference Figure 3.2-7). This lower structure can be 

separated from the main support structure for removal of the supply spool 

assembly. When installed in the film supply enclosure, the 9 lower support 

structure and spool cannot be removed without first removing the entire 5 

supply assembly. Figure 3.2-3 shows the 9 supply and looper assembly mounted 

on a test fixture, and indicates the four separation points for the lower 

support structure. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-OOB- W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.1.1.6 Instrumentation 

2.1.1.6.1 9 and 5 Tension Arm Instrumentation. The instrumentation cup of 

the conductive plastic potentiometer and the mechanical encoder on each 

tension arm, in conjunction with a resistance network (located in the supply 

assembly in the 9 subsystem and in the film handling electronics in the 5 

subsystem), generate a tension arm position telemetry signal. Figure 3.2-11 

is a schematic of the circuit, applicable to either the 9 or 5 subsystem. 

Sl closes at hightension trip point 

S2 closes at lowtension trip point 

Figure 3.2-11. General Tension Arm Instrumentation Circuit 

Switches Sl and S2 represent tracks on the mechanical encoder. The potentiometer yields a linear voltage output as a function of arm position. The encoder, 

by removing either Rl or R3 from the circuit, depending on arm position, causes 

the output discontinuities shown in Figure 3.2-12. 

The instrumentation cup of each wirewound potentiometer produces a redundant 

linear voltage output with the same slope, but uses the +15-volt instrumentation supply and does not have the encoder trip points. The schematic of the 

redundant instrumentation is similar to that in Figure 3.2-11, except that +15 

volts is used and there are no encoder switches. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand l e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System On\ y 
+-> 

;::l -l< P-< 

+-> <ll 

;::l b.Q 

0 ct! 

+-> 

i:: ,...; 

0 0 

·rl > 

+-> bi) ct! 

+-> i:: 

i:: ·rl 

<ll U1 

s ro 

;::l <ll 

f.-t f.-t 

+-> u U1 i:: 

i:: H 

H 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Mechanically Empty 

...... 

I 

..__. 

Redundant Instrumentation 

Electrically Empty (High Tension) -~-------------..... 

---------

-------------~~ ------..-......,, -.......____ Electrically Full (Low Tension) ! ..... , ........... _Redundant Instrumentation 

~-- Mec~anically Full 

Increasing Quantity 

Quantity Of Film In Tension Arm Looper 

Figure 3.2-12. General Tension Arm ·Instrumentation Output 

*Absolute voltage levels are provided in the Calibration Book supplied with 

each flight model. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System On\ y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Table 3. 2-1 summarizes the quantities of film and approximate film tension at 

the electrical and mechanical limits for both the 9 and 5 tension arms. 

TABLE 3.2-1 

TENSION ARM INSTRUMENTATION DATA 

Mechanically Full: 

Inches of Film 

Electrically Full: 

Inches of Film 

Approximate Film Tension 

Electrically Empty: 

Inches of Film 

Approximate Film Tension 

Mechanically Empty: 

Inches of Film 

IMP 5376 

and 

IMP 5015 

9 Tension Arm 

9.6 

8.7 

2.73 pounds 

0.3 

3.15 pounds 

0.0 

IMP 5377 

and 

IMP 5070 

5 Tension Arm 

9.4 

8.8 

1.47 pounds 

1. 3 

1. 54 pounds 

0.0 

2.1.1.6.2 9 and 5 Velocity Sensor Assemblies. The velocity of film being transferred by the camera from the supply to the take-up side of the looper is monitored 

by means of a 100-line optical incremental encoder directly coupled to a film path 

idler roller (see Figure 3.2-7 for roller locations). 

Each line generates a pulse which is amplified, shaped, and used to increment an 

8-digit binary counter in the supply assembly. The counter runs from 0 to 255, 

resetting on the next pulse and continuing. Calculation of the number of pulses 

per unit time indicates the average film velocity during the measured period for 

velocities greater than 0.84 inch per second (ips) and less than 23.6 ips. 

Each velocity sensor roller is 0.750 inch in diameter, yielding one pulse for 

every 0.024 inch of film passing. Figure 3.2-13 is a conceptual representation 

of the velocity sensor assembly. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e v1 a BY EMAN 

C:Ontrol System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Roller 

(0.750 in. dia. 9 or 5) 

Optical Incremental Encoder 

Figure 3.2-13. Film Velocity Sensor Conceptual Representation 

2.1.1.6.3 9 and 5 Quantity Sensor Assemblies. Both the 9 and 5 supplies 

have quantity sensor assemblies mounted to their respective frames which 

measure the amount of film transferred between supply and take-up (refer to 

Figure 3.2-7 for the sensor drive-roller locations). 

The 9 subsystem film quantity is measured by three sets of dual concentric 

potentiometers and associated resistance networks in the supply assembly. 

The coarse and fine potentiometers are connected to one end of an idler 

roller through a spring-loaded gear, gear train, and gear reducer. A separate spring-loaded gear drives the medium potentiometers through another 

gear reducer from the opposite end of the same roller, as shown in Figure 

3.2-14. Both spring-loaded gears are set to slip at 2 inch-ounces of torque. 

Therefore, if any binding were to occur in the quantity measuring system, the 

3.2-26 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System On\ y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD V-l Q) . CJ) N 

~ I 

l\J N 

0 -J ...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

...... GEA.R REDUCER 

9. 76388/1 

RATIO 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

SFRING CLUTCH(SET TO SLIPAT 2 OLIN. OF TORQUE}-, 

POT, IMF' 5023, PRIMARY FILM QUANTITY \ 

POT, IMP 5018, PRIMARY FILM QUANTITY 

,.,,,.,/' 

<"' FILM PATH 

r-POT. IMP 5071 • 

FILM QUANTITY,MEDIUM(5) 

-POT. IMP 5073, FILM QUANTITY,MEDIUM(5) 

/ FILM PATH 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

;-FLEX COU PL 1 f'G ( 6 PLACES) I /GIAR REDUCER (146.32/1 RATIO) 

I I ' I I 

'1"'' I I 

l I 

I "')( 

I "' 

/ 

Fl LM QUANTITY MEDIUM ( 9, 

- POT, IMP 50,7, PRIMARY FILM QUANTITY M[DIUM(9) 

~GEAR Rf.DUCF'l RATIO) 

CLUTCH (SET TO SLIP 

2 CZ. IN. OF TORQUE) 

\ \-MOIJfHED TO SUPPLY FRAME 

\ 

\- POT. IMP 5021, PRIMARY Fl LM QUANTITY COARSE ( 9) 

\___ POT, 1MP 5016, PRIMARY FILM QUAfnlTY COAR.SE ( 9) 

9 F1LM QUANTITY SENSOf< ASSEMBLY 

SPRING CLUTCH (SET TO SLIP 

AT 2 OZ.IN. OF TORQUE) 

-x 

+Y*,/,_+z 

FLEXIBLE COUPLiNG 

-Z -Y 

+x 

I GEA.R REDUCER (!07.43/1 iiATIO) 

5 FILM QUANT II Y SENSOR ASSEMBLY 

Figure 3.2-14. 9 and 5 Film Quantity Sensor Assemblies 

REDUCCR (1C7.43/1 RATIO) 

+x 

-Y,"'f/+.Z 

,,/' -z ".y 

-x 

NOTE: AXlS SHOWN ARE B\F-JJ8 

VEHICLE COORDINATES 

TOP 5ECRET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

film transport system would continue to function. One cycle of the fine potentiometers represents 30.1 feet of film, one cycle of the medium potentiometers 240 feet, and one cycle of the coarse potentiometers 3490 feet. 

The 5 film quantity sensor assembly is similar to the 9, but has only two 

sets of potentiometers. The redundant, dual-section potentiometers, with 

an internal gear ratio of 9.76388:1 between sections, are driven by an idler 

roller through a gear train and gear reducer (Figure 3.2-14). The potentiometers and gear train are isolated from the film handling system by means 

of a slip clutch which limits the drag of the quantity sensor assembly to 

less than 2 in.-oz. One cycle of the fine potentiometers represents 29.9 

feet of film, and one cycle of the medium potentiometers represents 292 

feet. 

2.1.1,6.4 Film Supply Temperature Sensors. Two temperature sensors are 

mounted on each supply assembly for monitoring the splicer mechanism and 

internal film supply enclosure temperatures. IMP 5243 on the 5 supply assembly and IMP 5302 on the 9 supply assembly are each located near the base of 

their respective splicer mechanisms. The 9 film supply temperature sensor, 

IMP 5013, is glued to the lower back of the 9 quantity sensor assembly baseplate (Figure 3. 2-14). The 5 film supply temperature sensor, IMP 5076, is 

glued to the +Y side of the main supply structure, approximately 1 inch 

above (+Z) the spindle support point. 

2.1.1,7 Supply Assembly and Alignment. Similar assembly procedures are 

employed for the 9 and 5 supplies. The spool axis is the basic reference 

for the unit. The spool mounting brackets are adjusted and pinned during 

assembly so as to align the spool axis to the mounting interface. Each 

roller or subassembly with rollers is adjusted and pinned by means of an 

accurate assembly fixture so that all rollers are parallel in two planes to 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

the spool axis. The frame assembly maintains this alignment throughout 

assembly, test, and operation on orbit. 

2.1.1,7,l 9 Supply Alignment Verification. Two mirrors that have been 

aligned to the supply spool axis during assembly of the supply are used to 

check the 9 supply alignment in the FSE by providing a fixed reference to 

measure against. The upper mirror (+Z) can be placed parallel to the film 

path to establish a line-of-sight for checking the position of the 5 supply, 

as explained below. The 9 supply reference mirror assembly is strictly 

support equipment; it does not remain with the vehicle. 

2.1.1.7.2 5 Supply Alignment Verification. An alignment mirror, permanently mounted to a cross member of the 5 supply frame, is used to check 

the alignment between the 5 supply unit and the 9 supply unit. The mirror 

is set parallel to the spool axis and positioned so that the line-of-sight 

established by the 9 supply reference can be used to verify the alignmemt 

of the 5 supply. 

2 .1.2 9 x 5 Take-up Assemblies 

The 9 x 5 take-up assemblies are devices which respool the 9.5-inch wide and 

5-inch wide films used in the PPS/DP EAC storing them for later recovery. The 

9 x 5 take-ups also act in conjunction with the supply assemblies to control 

film tension in the 9 and 5 film handling subsystems. Identical take-up 

(T/U) units are mounted in each of the two satellite reentry vehicles (T/U 1 

in SRV 1, and T/U 2 in SRV 2). Figures 3.2-15 and 3.2-16 show a representative 9 x 5 take-up assembly. 

2.1.2.1 Take-up Spools. Each take-up mechanism has a separate take-up spool 

for the 9 and 5 film strands, with an Approaching Full warning switch consisting of a pi voting arm, mechanical encoder, and wheel on each spool. The 

wheel contacts the edge of the film as the spool fills, forcing the pivoting 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System On! y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

~ 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

~ 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

VI 

N 

I 

VI 

0 

TOP SECREI G 

NOTES: 

1. Hardware shown is an engineering 

model - flight model differs 

in detail only. 

2. 9 spool cover removed. 

3. Coordinates shown are BIF-008 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

11J ' JI 

Displacement/ 

Compensator 

Assembly Figure 3.2-15, 9 x S Take-up Assembly (-Y View) 

Hand! e vi a BY EM AN 

C.On tro 1 System On I y G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

co 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

~ (.N CD 

Q) 

CJ) N 

I CD 

.. (.N 

I\) 1--' 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

...... 

G 

Thermistor Location 

IMP 5235: SRV 1 

IMP 5236: SRV 2 

Handt e vi a BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

Figure 3,2-16. 9 x 5 Assembly (-Z 

W-C-019840-RI-80 

9 

+X 

-+----++Y 

BIF-008 Vehicle 

Coordinates 

Spool Cover 

Assy 

Note: Hardware shown is 

an engineering model. 

Flight hardware differs 

in detail only. 

TOP SECln~:r G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

co 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

...... 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

arm outward. The arm drives the encoder directly, causing a change in voltage on the instrumentation point at the trip level, i.e., when the remaining 

spool capacity is 500 feet for the 9 spool and 300 feet for the 5 spool, 

assuming nominal 0.002-inch thick film. The associated resistance network 

is mounted on the take-up frame and generates four discrete output levels 

covering all combinations of 9 and 5 spools not full and approaching full, 

as follows: 

(1) 2. 0 volts 9 spool not full 

5 spool not full 

(2) 2.5 volts 9 spool not full 

5 spool approaching full 

(3) 3.0 volts 9 spool approaching full 

5 spool not full 

(4) 4. 5 volts 9 spool approaching full 

5 spool approaching full 

Table 3.2-2 surrunarizes the spool dimensions, film capacities, and instrumentation sensor trip points (IMP 5298, T/U 1, and IMP 5080, T/U 2). 

TABLE 3.2-2. 

9 AND 5 TAKE-UP SPOOLS DATA SUMMARY 

9 Spool 

Core Diameter (inches) 

Flange Diameter (inches) 

Spool Capacity (feet)* 

Warning Sensor Trip Point: 

Inches from center of spool 

Film on spool (feet)* 

3,93 

13.S 

5400 

6.437 

4900 

5 Spool 

1,43 

7.0 

1500 

3.120 

1200 

*Based on 0.002-inch thick film and allowance for film leader. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

81 F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

-----------· 

2.1.2.2 9 Take-up Spool Drive. Each 9 T/U spool is core-driven by a 24-volt 

de motor which has an internal speed reducing gearbox (22.78:1) for increased 

torque (see Figure 3.2-17). The output shaft is coupled to the spool through 

spur gears (3:1 reduction) to further lower the speed and increase the torque. 

The motor is capable of respooling 36.8 inches of film from the supply unit 

(the capacity of the take-up looper between electrical limits) and returning 

to rest within 3.0 seconds, or, within 3.5 seconds when the drive voltage is 

less than 24.5 vdc and less than 500 feet or more than 4000 feet of film is 

on the take-up spool. The motor has a straight line speed-torque characteristic with a slope that compensates as nearly as possible for the change in 

torque required as the quantity of film on the spool increases (see Figures 

3.2-18 and 3.2-19). Electromagnetic interference (EMI) filters are inserted 

into the motor power feed and return lines to ensure that the drive meets 

system EMI requirements. 

The combined 9 T/U spool motor current (for both T/U 1 and T/U 2) is monitored in the film control electronics (FCE) unit by means of a dropping resistor 

in the return line. The output is amplified in the FCE to produce a 0.5-volt 

to 4.85-volt signal for a current of 0.0 ampere to 3.0 amperes (IMP 5267). 

2.1.2.3 5 Take-up Spool Drive. Each 5 take-up spool is mounted on a shaft 

supported by the yoke frame (reference Figure 3.2-15). The spool core and 

flange are plastic, with teeth molded into one flange for the spool rim drive. 

The drive module, consisting of a de torque motor, ratchet, and tooth clutch, 

mounts to the yoke so that the drive gear meshes with the spool rim gear as 

shown in Figure 3.2-20. The gear ratio increases the effective motor torque 

by a factor of six. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

O:introl System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

V-1 

N 

I 

V-1 

.p. 

TOP SECRET G 

NOTES 

I. AXES SHOWN ARE 81F D08W VEHICLE COORDINATES. 

2.WARNING SENSOR SET Al 6 4311N. 

FROM CENT CR OF CORE. 

3. CORE - 3.9.3 IN. DIA, 

0.0. ·13.5 IN. 

EXTENSION--.... 

SPRING 

Handle via BYE.MAN 

f,ontrol System Only 

( 

fEXTENS,ON I SPRING 

I ,-DC I """'" --;----

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

GEARS 

~~INTERNAL GEAR 

144 T 

,,..-g-

/~IJ.ER ROLLER 

-x 

-z/ 

Figure 3.2-17. 

+Z 

+x 

-Y 

--FiLM-r --·SPRINGS(3) PATH // 

~---

----------......___ 

~\ 

j 

I / 

/ // 

ECCENTR1Cr10LLER 

l~~-_/ 

IDLER 

ROLi ER 

DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATOR 

9 Take-up Spool Assembly 

G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
TOP iiCRET .Q_ BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

350 

300 ··-·· ,, · .. ..-+-:.l- ~-.---.--+ ... ---~W-~-- ----..---- .~--f---

247 ,,,, "~··· ·~-.+ ··~··-- .. •···· ., •• , ..... _ -...,-. - ++...,'""r_,,,.._,.. . '' ' +-+-f-t-------...;-.,_._ ~+ ·-~~::, M .. - •• ~r--~~ ---- ·-•"--- ,,-.. 

250 . t ++H n": ,, "TT c• J~f+t·; .• ,.::::;::::;: ---- 10 ~ ~ +t ·j·.I.f'ts. .. t;. Hi jtrt+ttft; j~jf•TJ::-~~ ... ,._..._. ...•. _ !;-: )> __ '"".,.., ,__;- + .... .., , , L r-r:..--r~ . . • --:·.r:- -~ i \,j,J )> 

"'O ' ·-· - ....._~.;,..,__,.._,,.. ,_ ... -~:·•0--·- ··-· '--"-~~ -- ~-~---- '--~~---·-- ~-~ ~ "'O ~ .,_,, "++ 

~ ..... .... .,.._,. ~ ~ - 't'~ ··i-~ ~-1-~-- •+-ec··· ,,,,,, ' --·-~· ---' ,. .. -__,, 

·-····--- ·· -~ ~ ~ .,_,, a 200 ~ • • --- - - -· ~----- -- B '-' a 

< "'O ·- :.:·=-::::::~::~ ~ '"_. _ _:::::=:=::_ !·--:::+~~ -~;;w--~ < ~ Cl) ~ I"" --~ . .,. ~ ~ l· ~~ .-:-. ..; ' 4 -r; - ., ~ ~-;:= --~-~ .:.;.:·;· _ _,,,__ ,......._._ .,,,, ---~ "---+~ -- ..μ ~ 

- ill 'i·cr+ + -~ ::t +" .• , "HH~ "'' ... ,,. ",.,,,,.,. •··•i ..... .. . i:: - Q r:::i.. f A ,_,,.~-+~,.; < ~.,.+ •++,'·H-4 . .. • ..,.'I:' ill Q 

..., [.{) 150 ... ~:;:+;.:::. .. :::::r:: ............ i:t;;»-:_''. ... ::.,._.....:: .... - .. ::::.: .. 6 !--< ..., 

'"T1 - ~--· • \.;V.::;...;.-=. ...... :::: '"T1 ;v 1-+i . -· ,._, ;v 

~ "'.' ·- ·- -~ ·~- ·~ ··:~·--~·-- "-·-· u ~ 

~ ;. -+h r-+T'·11 f r 'I u .. +r,. 1 ·+!,~ +r· t:;:;·::'·' ..._ . .... ,.: """'r' '" --~ .. · · --- ~ CJ) .. -++ • r , . .., ::::: :.::.; ..• - ,... . ...... +.:: .... ::.. ..:·.::..-=- CJ) 

CD ~ 100 " 1 ~ •• , .... TH-; ....... __,...,.,,. f-• , __ .,, •. •. 4 CD 

N rt . ·- .... '·- ' ,;. , ....... . 

~ I -·~ -- ' . --·--P u- l!· ...._ + ·-~·· ~- ~_;::::::::-:: __ ~-- ~-=~ ~ 

...Jr.. ~ + -.....- ~~ .. :~·~_;-r·•··~·~~~~.~4'"- -··*··-.... ·~-·-·... ·.·:~ ~~·· ·-- ·~~- b-~ ...Jr.. 

-J ·,..;~ " - . ; ......... , ... .,.. .. ~ " ~ ;+...., . .;. ' . ........... -J 0 50 tt - 2 0 

I\) ...... , .•. ··-~<- .,. .... 1-·+·>· •· ·tt··•· +;-;--;- . ·t·•· ·t· - - ...•• .. ·- I\) 

-- + ++· ... ~ . ' it tt - ..... + -- ..... , -~ .Yn-.f:ftl. :r~- t H . ~ . ·- . -·- __ ,... --·· - ..... .j:>. .... .J... .j:>. 

() ~-· -..+ ,: ,: ' • ..;...". ,.; r Ith..:.. "=t" ;:i·; :~~~: 510··:::::::7:-:I' - 625: .. .. 0 .,...;-··~-··. . ·-- ... 0 f--·· .. ' ,, . .. ..,_.. ••. ,J ,.. ..... ~- '···-~- ' - ..... -~· . ·t-- .. 0 0 0 .. J .. >.·+···+t··t-+~·->-•~ ,;.-........ ~_.,.,.._._,,_ ·:t-•·"'<--•·+t<• ••-<·· ~-=~-- --~···---~-·~-.:+:.: ~~-1 0 

~ o 100 200 300 4otr -' · soo 61iu---· - --- 1 rn .. __ ~ 

© © rj Torque -in.) rj 

I\) I\) 

Hand! e vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 

3.2-18. 9 Motor Performance Curves 

TCJP SECRFT G 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

.. 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TAP ~Ff"IUT __.§_ 

(.N 

N 

I 

(.N 

Q\ 

Handle via BYE.MAN 

Control System Only 

350 

300 

250 

200 

150 

100 

50 

0 

0 100 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

. . 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

200 300 400 500 600 700 0 

0"1 

0 

Torque (oz-in.) co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

3.2-19. 9 Motor 

TOP SECIUT G 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP. SECRET G 

NOTES 

2. WARNING SENSOR SET AT 3.!20'N. 

FROM CENTER OF CORE. 

3. CORE 1.43 IN. DIA. 

Vl 

N 

I 

Vl 

-J 

Handle vi a BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

O.D. 7.0IN. 

IMP 5298 Sl?V 

1'.1P 5rjj 0 "~ •• 

Figure 3.2-20. 5 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

BALL BEARING 

-Y 

-x~ -

-z~x+z 

x +Y 

·r:::::::::::::::--------FILM-------

PATH 

WOEllLE RCUER 

RIM GEAR ~22 

~ 

TEETH) 

CLUTCH SPRING 

1 Assemb 

TAP .!\f("IFT G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

~-G- Bl F-008- W-C-019840-Rl-80 ----·----------------·. 

The 5 T/U is able to empty an electrically full take-up looper (36. 8 inches 

of film) and come to rest within 3.0 seconds. The speed-torque characteristics are shown in Figure 3.2-21. To minimize variations in the characteristics of the take-up drive, the operating voltage is regulated at 18.7* 

vdc in the film handling electronics (FHE) module. EMI filters, similar to 

those used in the 9 T/U drives, are inserted into the power lines to prevent 

excessive electrical noise in the system. 

The combined 5 spool drive current for both T/U 1 and T/U 2 is monitored 

by a dropping resistor in the power return line at the FHE. The instrumentation output (IMP 5075) is amplified to produce a linear signal ranging from 

0.25 volt to 4.75 volts (0.0 ampere to 2.0 amperes). 

2.1.2.4 Take-up Spool Clutches. To prevent the film spools from backing-up 

and unwinding film during use, each spool is fitted with a ratchet-and-pawl 

mechanism. The three pawls in the 9 system can be disengaged by energizing 

the solenoid linked to the pawl release cam. As the cam is rotated, pins 

force the pawls outward, releasing the ratchet (see Figure 3.2-17). 

For the 5 take-up (Figure 3.2-20), the ratchet-and-pawl mechanism is released 

by a tooth clutch. The ratchet is connected to the motor shaft and rotates 

with it. The two pawls and tension springs are attached to the upper clutch 

plate. The lower clutch plate, which is free to move only in an axial direction, is held to the upper plate by the clutch spring and prevents the 

upper plate from turning. An electromagnet is energized to release the tooth 

clutch and allow the upper plate and pawls to turn with the ratchet about 

the motor axis. 

After the ratchet mechanism has been released on a spool, the motor can be 

reversed and film removed from the spool for ground testing, or for processing 

after recovery. There is no circuitry in the PPS/DP EAC which can release the 

* Speed-torque curve plotted for 18.9 vdc operation (Specification Limit) 

3.2-38 

~G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

1. 5 

1.0 

Torque (oz-in.) 

Figure 3.2-21. 5 T/U Motor Performance Curves 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

,--... 

.,., 

Q) 

H 

Q) 

~ 

.μ 

i::: 

Q) 

H 

H 

;::l 

u 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 ----·-----------

ratchet and allow film to despool while on-orbit; the release mechanism 

can be powered only through a test connector. To prevent reversal of a motor 

while the spool ratchet is still engaged, a switch is provided in the motorreversing circuit which is closed only when the release mechanism (tooth 

clutch or solenoid) reaches the extreme of its travel. 

2.1.2.5 9 x 5 Take-up Mounting Frame. All components of the T/U assembly 

are mounted on a single structure consisting of two side plates separated 

by cross members. The 5 spool support yoke is mounted on one of these cross 

members as shown in Figure 3.2-15. A plate attached to the frame behind the 

5 take-up spool covers the 9 spool, preventing any interference between the 

two film strands, which might otherwise occur when one or both strands are 

free (as after splicing). The entire assembly is fastened to the recovery 

capsule by four adjustable mounts which are part of the SRV, providing translational adjustment in the X and Y directions plus a small amount of rotational adjustment about the X-axis for the entire mechanism. 

2.1.2.6 9 x 5 Take-up Film Strand Guidance. Film guiding devices are required to direct the film strands and to correct for misalignments between 

components along the film path. The devices used for this application operate by converting lateral and angular misalignments of the film path within 

the plane of the film into helical (neutral axis) twists along the length 

of the redirected path. 

Three basic requirements for film guiding are: 

(1) a means for providing compliance to allow the film 

to be redirected 

(2) a means for indicating the correct film path direction 

(3) a force to redirect the film in that direction 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Cont ro I Sf stern On I y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

In the displacement compensator, consisting of a pivot frame supporting an 

eccentric roller and an idler roller for the 9.5-inch wide film, compliance 

comes from tilting the compensator frame and from the friction-reducing action 

of the eccentric roller; direction comes from orienting the pivot axis of the 

compensator frame and the next following idler roller; and force comes from the 

tension distribution in the film. Weights on the compensator frame are pinned 

in position after mounting the rollers to balance the assembly. The frame 

is then attached to the main take-up structure at its pivot point. A simplified version of the displacement compensator is used for guiding the 5-

inch wide film. It consists of a pivoted wobble roller (two degrees of freedom) attached to the support structure. 

The four pivot rollers in the 9 and 5 supply assemblies (reference Section 

2.1.1.4) each have one degree of freedom and a 90-degree film wrap, and ensure correct tracking between the supply and take-up assemblies. In addition, the 5 film path to SRV 1 requires two intermediate idler rollers, one 

in the 5 travel viewer box and one in the 9 travel viewer box, to guide the 

film around SRV 2 and into SRV 1. 

2.1.2.7 Alignment. The 9 film spool axis is the basic reference for all 

components of the T/U assembly, including the guidance rollers and the 5 

film spool. A mirror with cross hairs is aligned to the 9 spool axis and 

mounted on the T/U frame so that it is visible from various locations in 

the film chutes. The reference mirror can then be used in conjunction with 

optical support equipment to align the 9 x 5 take-up assembly in the SRV. 

At higher levels of assembly, the mirror serves as a reference point for 

checking the alignment of the 9 and 5 supply assemblies in the film supply 

enclosure (Section 2,1.1.4.3). 

2.1.2.8 9 x 5 Take-up Instrumentation. In addition to those points previously described (the take-up warning sensors and take-up motor current 

monitors), the only other instrumentation points directly associated with the 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BI F-008-W-C-019840- RI-80 

9 x 5 take-up assemblies are temperature sensors (IMP 5235 on T/U 1 and 

IMP 5236 on T/U 2). Each thermistor is glued to a frame cross member and 

is centered on the Z-axis just below (-Z) the 5 wobble roller. Processing 

electronics for the thermistor output are located in the instrumentation 

processor. 

2.2 9 x 5 Dual Platen Camera Description 

The 9 x 5 dual platen camera is a strip camera with the image focused through 

a slit aperture onto moving film. The camera system utilizes both 9.5-inch 

wide and 5-inch wide films wrapped around their respective cylindrical 

platens, thereby maintaining the proper position in the image plane of the 

PPS/DP EAC optical system. Control of camera functions is accomplished by the 

9 and 5 frequency phase lock loop electronics and the 9 and 5 camera electronics assemblies located in the SEM. 

The camera assembly consists of the camera housing, the camera tilt frame 

couplers, and the 9 and 5 pivot frames within the housing. Each pivot 

frame supports a film platen and platen drive, and a variable exposure mechanism (VEM). Each pivot frame is attached to the camera housing at two 

points and is supported at a third point by the associated focus adjust 

mechanism (FAM). 

The size and shape of the optical beam at the focal plane allows only the 9 

platen to be centered directly on the optical axis. A folding mirror, centered 0.725 inch below (-Z) the optical axis, is used to divert the image-forming 

rays toward the 5 platen (-Z direction). A second mirror, above (+Z) the 

axis, diverts the image to the focus detector assembly on the 9 pivot frame 

(reference Part 3,Section 6). Figure 3.2-22 is a simplified diagram of the 

camera housing internal components, showing the relationship of the 9 and 5 

3.2-42 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TSP SEeltE'f 

ALIGNMENT 

PIN 

BEAM 

SPLITTER 

FOCUS SENSOR·· 

OPTICS 

FOCUS SENSOR 

ASSEMBLY 

9 EXPOSURE SLIT 

5PIVOT 

FRAME 

...G._ 

•X+-X -z BIF -008 VEHICLE 

COOHDINATES 

Handle via BYEMAll Control Systen Only 

SPRING 

r9 PIVOT 

FLEXURE 

SECTION A-A 

9PIVOT 

FRAME 

ROLLER 

9 FPLLE MOTO.q 

9 FILM PLATEN 

ROLLER_/ }

. I 5 FILM PLATEN J ROLLER 

ECCENTRIC DRIVE 

!CRANK ON GEARBOX) 

-X VIEW 

(COVER REMOVED) 

Figure 3,2-22, 9 x 5 Dual Platen Camera Internal Configuration 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

5 GEARBOX 

5 FPLLE 

MOTOR 

3.2-43/3.2-44 

5 ENCODER 

PROCESSING UNIT 

HH Sl!CkET _G_ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008-_ W-C-019840-RI-80 

pivot frames, folding mirrors, and the focus detector assembly. Also shown 

is the encoder processing unit, which is used to transmit the platen drive 

optical encoder feedback signals to the frequency phase lock loop electronics 

(FPLLE) units. 

2.2.1 Camera Housing 

The camera housing shown in Figure 3.2-23 is a shell that encloses the major 

components of the dual platen camera, with the exception of the electronic 

units (i.e .• FPLLEs and camera electronics assemblies) which are mounted 

in the SEM. The housing is supported by the Ross corrector and field lens 

assembly, with the last element of the RCFLA fully potted on the perimeter 

and with a gasket at the camera/RCFLA interface to seal the film path. At 

the -X end of the camera, the camera tilt frame couplers attach to the supply 

assembly tilt frame couplers and a bellows seals the film path between the 

FSE and camera housing. 

The housing itself is a riveted structure consisting of a baseplate, skin., 

top ring, and cover. A high reflectance outer surface limits thermal input 

and a low reflectance inner surface, coupled with internal baffles, limits 

film flare effects. 

Internally, a set of braces near each end are riveted to the baseplate and 

skin to provide rigidity. Additional rigidity is provided by a triangular 

shaped torque tube which connects the braces and is also riveted to the 

baseplate and skin. The cover, which attaches to the top ring and the braces, 

provides a mounting surface for the tilt frame couplers. The camera baseplate, which mounts to the RCFLA interface, contains two pins to which all 

camera internal components are aligned. 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e v i a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SFCAIJ;:f G 

5 FAM Gearbox Mounting 

(.N 

N 

I 

-!'> 

(J\ 

'~ . 

\ 

9 FPLLE Drive Cover/"~ 

9 Slit Cleaning " 

Access Point 

Handle via BYEMAN 

I System On 

Light 

" 

9 Pivot Flexure 

Mounting Pad (2 Places)~ 

Test Encoder 

Mounting Access Point ~ 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

"' 

9 FPLLE Test Encoder 

Mounting Access Point 

5 Slit Cleaning 

Access Point 

)> 

/'

5. FPLLE ~ Drive C over o 

~ c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 (2 Places) 

FAM Gearbox 

(Hidden) 

+Z 

+Y 

+X 

BIF-008 Vehicle Coordinates 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

Figure 3.2-23. Camera Housing (Cover Removed) 

~ 

~ ., 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

The 9 platen is located on the optical axis in the ±Z direction, parallel 

to the two mounting pins about the X-axis, and parallel to the camera mounting surface about the Z-axis. The 5 platen is parallel to the mounting surface and optically parallel to the 9 platen. 

For instrumentation purposes, a thermistor is mounted on each pivot frame 

near the platen drive motor and encoder to monitor the frame temperature. 

2.2.2. 9 and 5 Pivot Frame Assemblies 

The 9 and 5 pivot frame assemblies shown in Figures 3.2-24 and 3.2-25 mount 

to the camera housing structure through two flexures at one end, and through 

the FAM gearbox by means of an eccentric drive shaft at the other end. The 

9 pivot frame provides mounting for the platen, FPLLE film-drive components, 

the 9 variable exposure (slit) mechanism, the input and output film guidance 

rollers, and the focus detector assembly (not shown in Figure 3.2-24). 

The 5 pivot frame supports a similar set of components, excluding a focus 

detector, modified to accommodate the narrower width film. 

2.2.2.1 Platen Drive Assembly. The 9 and 5 platens are each driven by a 

frequency phase lock loop servo system consisting of the platen and its 

drive motor, an optical encoder, and a frequency phase lock loop electronics 

(FPLLE) unit. The phase lock loop design used in the PPS/DP EAC incorporates 

the desired characteristics of fast start-up and stopping for film conservation and drive smoothness compatible with performance requirements. 

The drive assemblies for the 9 and 5 subsystems are essentially the same. 

The Invar platen is attached to aluminum shafts which rotate in preloaded 

duplex bearings mounted in the side walls of the pivot frame. On one end 

the drive motor is mounted directly to the shaft and the optical encoder is 

connected to this shaft by a flexible coupling. The coupling is covered by 

a damping material to reduce the transmissibility of motor disturbances to 

3.2-47 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand! e vi a BY EM AN 

Cont ro 1 Sys tern On 1 y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

(.N 

. 

N 

I 

+:-

00 

TOP SECRET 

Handle via BYEMAN 

I System 

G 

Figure 3"2-24. 9 Pivot Frame Assembly 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Focus Oefe~for'~ 

Mounting Pads ~ ·-'.< ,,' 

I U I" ::Al!LNl!T 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

G 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

V-l Q) 

CJ) 

CD . 

N I\) I 0 ..,. ...... !.O -J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TAP SECIUiT 

Handle via BY04AN 

Control System Only 

G 

+Y 

Interframe Marke 

Assembl 

Figure 3.2-25. S Pivot Frame Assembly 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Pivot Frame 

Flexure 

(2 Placesi, • 

)\) l 1 l 

~ Holding Plates ~(Assembly Aids Only) <~ • 'c •''' •••.;- •• • ; 

TOP SfCRET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

the encoder. At the other end, the bearing is free to float in the pivot 

frame to allow for thermal expansion, and the shaft accommodates the 

attachment of an external test encoder. 

2.2.2.1.1 Film Platen. The platen is a 3.5-inch diameter, machined, Invar 

tube coated with Electrofilm (a bonded dry lubricant) to provide the necessary 

coefficient of friction between the platen and film, and to minimize reflection of imaging light back into the film emulsion. The 9 platen contains 

three objective lenses, and the 5 platen contains one objective lens for the 

purpose of measuring the position of the platen surface with respect to the 

optical image plane after installation of the camera on the COA. The single 

5 platen objective is centered on the optical axis. One objective of the 

9 platen is placed on the optical axis, and the remaining two objectives are 

located at the 1.05-degree, half-field angle positions. 

The objectives are high quality, 8-mm focal length lenses designed to fit 

into threaded tubes in the platens. The tubes run perpendicular to the 

platen axis, facing small openings in the platen at each end. A plug permits access to the objective during assembly and alignment, and then closes 

the opening to the size of the hexagonal hole in the plug to prevent dimpling of the film during operation. The plug on the 5 platen is visible behind the exposure opening in Figure 3.2-25. 

2.2.2.1.2 Platen Drive Motor. Each platen has a redundant drive system. 

This is accomplished by two permanent-magnet, frameless, de torque motors 

in a single housing, which can be powered by redundant sides in the FPLLE 

(refer to Section 2.5.3). Further reliability is gained by having redundant 

brushes in each motor. The rotors are mounted on an adapter sleeve which 

mates with the platen shaft on the same diameter as that used for the bearings. 

The permanent magnet fields and brushes are assembled to the motor housing, 

and this in turn is attached to the pivot frame. 

3. 2- 50 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand 1 e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.2.2.1.3 Platen Drive Encoder and Encoder Processor. The optical encoder 

consists of a 3-inch diameter code disk and 8 readout stations, with 4 stations 

(90° apart) being paralled to produce redundant channels. The disk and slits 

have chrome-on-glass patterns generating 9,000 code cycles per revolution. The 

readout stations each consist of a light-emitting diode (LED) and four photodetectors. One detector pair generates a sine signal and the other detector 

pair generates a cosine signal. The assembly is contained in a single housing 

coupled to the platen shaft. Two encoder processors are mounted on the camera 

housing. One processor is used to process the 9 encoder signals and the other 

processes the 5 encoder signals. Each processor has isolated redundant channels 

for shaping the encoder output waveform, and utilizes line drivers to relay the 

information to the FPLLE. 

2.2.2.2 Variable Exposure Mechanism. The variable exposure mechanisms, also 

known as the slit mechanisms, control exposure of both the 9-inch and 5-inch 

wide films by positioning moveable blades in front of the respective platens. 

The blades, driven by cams as shown in Figure 3.2-26, provide 16 nominal slit 

openings for each subsystem. The variable exposure mechanisms are also used 

to place additional information on the films, to aid in post-flight analyses. 

LEDs, controlled by the camera electronics assembly modules, produce data 

tracks (vehicle clock information) in both subsystems. Interframe marks are 

produced along the edge of the film by apertures illuminated by incandescent 

lamps that are also controlled by the camera electronics assembly. The slit 

blades, in addition to controlling exposure levels, generate fiducial lines 

to delineate the main scene, and provide the smear slits which create a 

double exposure to be used in measuring smearo 

2.2.2.2.1 Variable Exposure Mechanism Blade Control. Positioning of the 

slit blades is controlled by the lead screw driven cam/cam follower assemblies 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD (.N 

Q) 0 

CJ) N 

CD I .. U1 I\) 

0 N 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

ICJlll !;FCRE.J _G 

Note: Film Motion is in 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80. 

Followers 

Places) 

Figure 3.2-26. 9 Variable Exposure Mechanism 

+Z 

- +Y 

BIF 008 Vehicle 

Coordinates 

Handle via BYEMAN TAP sccns:T G 

1 System - · 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

which are pictured in Figures 3.2-27 and 3.2-28. To understand the motion of 

the blades, it is important to note that the outer cam is connected to the 

outer blade, and the inner cam is connected to the inner blade. Thus, as the 

cam followers move inward and force the cams closer together, the blades are 

driven further apart. A guide rod is added parallel to the lead screw for 

greater system stability. The cam/cam follower concept prevents complete 

closure of the blades as a result of any single failure. 

A one-piece mounting frame provides support for all VEM components including 

the blade guide rods, lead screw, lead screw guide rod, motor, encoder, potentiometers, data lamps, interframe marker, and required components for the 

fiducial lines and smear slits. The frame, in turn, attaches to the mounting 

pads of the respective pivot frame. 

The narrowest slit openings, which require the smallest tolerances, are positioned near the mounting frame to minimize inaccuracies caused by flexing of 

the lead screw and guide rod. A minimal amount of backlash is required in 

the drive to prevent binding of the mechanism, and springs are used to maintain contact between the cam follower and control side of the cam groove to 

eliminate the effects of this backlash. Flats added to the cam surface for 

the eight smallest positions compensate for any drive system positional inaccuracies in the low range. A continuous curve generates the remaining 

eight positions, and in conjunction with the encoder deadband, results in two 

discrete slit widths for each step from 9 to 15, depending on the direction 

from which the step is approached. The resultant difference in exposure level 

is of such small magnitude that this slit variability is generally ignored. 

Table 3.2-3 lists the nominal slit width for each position. The ratio between successive operational slit widths is approximately 1.334, i.e., 0.125 

Log E (exposure). 

3.2-53 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
~ 

"O 

"O 

~ 

0 

< 

ro 

~ 

-

0 

~ 

~ 

ro 

ro 

00 ~ 

~ 

ro N 

I ~ ~ 

0 

~ ~ 

~ 

-

0 

~ 

-

~ 

~ 

0 

0 

~ 

0 

© 

~ 

~ 

~ 

~ 

TAP ~rra~:r G 

Cam Followers 

Interframe Marker 

' 

/ / 

Hand! e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Smear Slits 

Location 

Cams 

Data Lamp 

Assembly 

Lead Screw 

Guide Rod 

Blade Support 

Guide Rod 

Mounting Frame 

Figure 3.2-27. 9 Variable Exposure Mechanism 

Instrumentation 

Potentiometers 

/ 

' 

Lead Screw 

+X 

+Y +Z 

BIF-008 Vehicle 

Coordinates 

JO P SEEIU:T G 

~ 

"O 

"O 

~ 

0 

< 

ro 

~ 

-

0 

~ 

~ 

ro 

ro 

00 

~ 

ro 

~ 

0 

~ 

~ 

-

0 

~ 

-

~ 

~ 

0 

0 

~ 

0 

© 

~ 

~ 

~ 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

G 

Smear Slit 

Location 

(.N 

N 

I 

(J1 

(J1 

Mounting 

Hand! e vi a BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

In terframe Marker 

Assemb 

/ 

Drive Motor 

Figure 3.2-28. 5 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Support 

Rod 

Mechanism 

Instrumentation / 

Potentiom~ 

Encoder 

Support 

Lead Screw 

Lead Screw +Z 

Guide Rod 

+X 

BIF-008 Vehicle Coordinates 

IQ p 5ECRE f _g_ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3. 2-3 

OPERATIONAL SLIT WIDTHS 

Nominal 

Slit Width 

Slit Position (inch) 

1 0.0040 

2 0.0054 

3 0.0072 

4 0.0094 

5 0.0126 

6 0.0168 

7 0.0224 

8 0.0300 

9 0.0400 

10 0.0534 

11 0.0712 

12 0.0948 

13 0.1266 

14 0.1686 

15 0.2250 

16 0.3000 

2. 2. 2. 2. 2 Variable Exposure Mechanism Drive. Each VEM is controlled by a 

closed loop servo system consisting of an ac motor, an optical encoder, and 

control circuitry in the associated camera electronics assembly. The time 

needed to move from one operational slit to the next larger or smaller is 1.0 

second maximum. 

The motor is a 2-phase hysteresis synchronous type which runs at approximately 

6500 rpm. Internal gearing reduces the speed by 27:1 so that the output shaft 

rotates at approximately 240 rpm. This drive force is transmitted through the 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle v1 a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BI F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

slit mechanism gear train shown in Figure 3.2-29 to the lead screw, the 

optical encoder, and the instrumentation potentiometers. 

Positional feedback data for each electronics unit is provided by the dual 

track optical encoder which rotates 21 degrees for each of the 15 transitions 

(16 steps). Step 1 is at the 5-degree encoder centerband position and step 

16 at 320 degrees. The cam mechanical stops occur at -2.5 and 324.5 degrees. 

Total encoder station bandwidth is ±3 degrees around the nominal centers. 

The two instrumentation potentiometers and their associated processing networks 

in the camera produce redundant signals indicating slit position. Driven by a 

helical gear on the lead screw shaft, they must rotate approximately 470 

degrees to cover the full range of slit positions. Thus the monitor outputs, 

IMPs 5049 and 5050 on the 9 VEM, and 5055 and 5056 on the 5 VEM, appear as 

two overlapping voltage cycles. 

2.2.2.2.3 Film Marking Assemblies. Each variable exposure mechanism produces 

the fiducial lines, data tracks, interframe marks and smear slit images present 

on returned film. The film formats and pertinent dimensional information are 

shown in Figures 3.2-30 and 3.2-31. 

2.2.2.2.3.1 Data Tracks. There are two pairs of data tracks on each exposure 

mechanism. One pair is designed for low mode and one pair for high mode. For 

either mode, the two data tracks, A and B, provide timing information in the 

form of light pulse exposures representing the vehicle timing signals. (Timing 

signal A inverted and logically summed with timing signal B.) (See Section 

2.5.4.2.4.) This combined signal is generated in the associated camera 

electronics and used to control two LEDs mounted on either side of each slit 

centerline. 

The LED circuit board supports a 0.020-inch thick glass mask with apertures 

etched in chrome to control the apparent size of the LED chip and to limit data 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Ord y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD (.N CD 

Q) N CJ) I CD t.n I\) 00 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

l~P SECRE.I 

Bevel Gears 

(2: 1) 

AC Motor 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

C.Ontrol System Only 

G 

Cam Fol lowers 

Duplex 

Bearings 

Lead Screw 

0. 1 inch/ rev 

Nut Follower 

Single Thread 

Helical Drive Gear 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Slit Position 

Instrumentation 

Optical Encoder 

(1:24) 

Figure 3.2-29. Variable Exposure Mechanism Drive System Schematic 

TOP SECAiT G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) (;<I 

CJ) . CD N .. I I\) VI 

...... 

0 ~ 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

G .....__.,_ BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

9.460 +0.010 

-0.005 

(See Note 3) 

Data Track A 

(0.005 *0.001 Wide) 

Data Track B 

(0.005 *0.001 Wide) 

Smear Image 

(0.100 Wide) 

(Low Mode) 

NOTES FOR FILM FORMATS 

Ii. 

Main Image 

--i 1--o. 004 *o. 002 

-o.o4o 

' 

i r----- 0.250 t0.003 

1. Illustrations not to scale. 

2. All dimensions are in inches. Tolerances are 

Smear 

0.01 

unless otherwise specified. Tolerances given are of the 

exposure apertures. 

3. This is the film width and, therefore, is not a camera-controlled format dimension. 

4. This dimension is for the nominal film width and a 

perfectly centered film strand. Fiducial 

~ 

Figure 3. 

Lines 

0.004 *0.002 

~ 0.225 Nom. 

(See Note 4) 

~4"' 

Emulsion 

Side Up 

(0.100 Wide) __ __, 

Mode) 

Film Motion 

In Camera -1 

Optical 

'i 

9 Film Format 

PPS/DP EAC 

COORDINATES 

+Zf /+Y 

+X 

(out of page) 

2.095 *0.030 

Frame Line 

Position Marks 

(0 .125 Wide• 

O .190 Long Nom.) 

IMAGE PLANE 

COORDINATES 

+y (into page) 

-(

+z 

+x 

"WARNING - THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BE USED AS A SOURCE FOR DERIVATIVE CLASSIFICATION" 

Hand! e vi a BY EM AN 

f.ontrol System Only TOP SFClfH G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

.. 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

=t6P §~CREl ..Q._ BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

~ 

N 

I 

Cl\ 

0 

0.325 Norn. 

(See Note 4) 

Frame Line 

Position Marks 

(O .125 Wide, 

O .190 Long Norn.) 

1.250 ~0.030 

L_ 

,:. of Slit 

NOTES FOR FILM FORMATS 

1. Illustrations not to scale. 

2. All dimensions are in inches. Tolerances 

are +0,005 unless otherwise specified. 

Tolerances given are of the exposure 

apertures. 

4.960 +0.010 

-0.005 

(See Note 3) 

4.430 :t0.003 

in Image Including Fiducial Lines 

.004 t0.002 0.004 t0.002 __..._,,.. ---- Emulsion 

Side Up 

Smear Image (0.100 Wide) 

(Low Mode) 

Film Motion 

In Camera 

Data Track A 

(0.005 ~0.001 Wide) 

Data Track B 

(0.005 :t0.001 Wide) 

1- 0.150 t0.003 

PPS/DP EAC IMAGE PLANE 

COORDINATES COORDINATES 

-X 

+z 3. This is the film width and, therefore, 

is not a camera-controlled format dimension. 

0.06 

1 

(into page) 

4. This dimension is for the nominal film width 

and a perfectly centered film strand. 

Optical I I Fiducial 

rt --.-I Ci, 

Figure 3.2-31. 5 Film Format 

y +y 

+Z 

(out of page) -x 

'WARNING - THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BE USED AS A SOURCE FOR DERIVATIVE CLASSIFICATION'" 

Handle via BYEMAN 

C.Ontro~stem Only T 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

track edge spreading. 

The following matrices show the position of the data lamps and also show the size 

of the mask apertures. 

Data 

LamE 

A 

B 

A 

B 

Position 

with 

Respect to 

Slit £ 

Outside 

Inside 

Outside 

Inside 

Distance from Slit t 

(Referenced to Direction 

Film Motion) 

0.05 After 

0.05 Ahead 

0 .15 Ahead 

0.15 After 

of 

LOW MODE 

AEerture 

LED 

0.008 Dia. 

0.008 Dia. 

HIGH MODE 

0.002 x 0.008 

0.004 x 0.008 

Size 

Platen 

0.001 x 0.005 

0.001 x 0.005 

0.0005 x 0.005 

0.0005 x 0.005 

The relative data lamp positions are the same for both the 9 and 5 slit mechanisms. 

0 

Each LED emits light at a wavelength of approximately 6600 A to which all 

candidate films are s.ensitive. The light level of each LED is adjusted during 

assembly by fixed select-in-test resistors. 

2.2.2.2.3.2 Interframe Marks. The interframe marks are two rectangular exposures 

placed on the film just before the start of a photographic operation indicating 

the end of one frame and the beginning of the next. Placement of the interframe 

marks with respect to the slit centerline is shown in the film format figures. 

The interframe marker output is the radiant flux emitted by the recorders which 

sensitizes the film in such a manner as to permit the markers to appear on the 

Versamat-processed Type 124 negative at a minimum density of 2.0 above gross fog. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEtviAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

81 F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Light output is provided by two tungsten filament incandescent lamps mounted 

to an epoxy-glass board. A metal block on the VEM supports the lamp assembly 

and contains the two rectangular apertures. The amount of light is adjusted 

during assembly by fixed select-in-test resistors. 

2.2.2.2.3.3 Smear Slits and Fiducial Lines. The smear slits and fiducial lines 

on both 9 and 5 films are created by the shape of the slit blades and masks 

shown in Figure 3.2-32. The fiducial apertures are considerably wider in the 

direction of film travel than the main exposure slit, providing a narrow band 

of high exposure at each edge of the main scene. 

The smear slit images on the 9 film (data track side) and 5 film (interframe 

position mark side) are produced by identical size blade apertures. These images 

are to be used for low-mode analysis. Each image is a double exposure (at 

differing levels) of the same scene produced by a leading and a lagging aperture 

with the following widths: 

Leading ws 

n 

where: ws 

n 

w8 

w 

n 

is 

is 

is 

= 

th 

Lagging ws 

n 

smear slit width for n exposure slit position 

the exposure slit width for the 8th exposure slit 

the exposure slit width for the th n exposure slit 

position 

position 

The center-to-center spacing of the smear-slit pair (leading and lagging) 

associated with a specific operational exposure slit position is determined by 

the following relationship: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Cont ro I Sys tern On I y 

w 

n 

2 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET G 

V'I 

N 

I 

0\ 

V'I 

NOTES; 

Section A-A (9 Slit) 

Section B-B (5 Slit) 

I. hole for film tracking 

is at least 

open for slit steps 15 

2. Interframe markers not shown. 

3 • 

between interframe marker 

and platen is 0.008 inches 

Smear Slit Location ~ 

9 Slit Blades 

B LED's 

0085 

(Nominal) 

Smear Slit Location 

0.217 

Viewing Hole 

Slit Blades 

004 (Fiducial) 

Figure 3.2-32. 9 and 5 Sl Bl 

Hand! e vi a BYEMAN 

Control Syst6!1 Only 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

I 

Film Motion 

Fi Im Motion 

t 

ls 

0.004 

(Fiducial) 

Smear Slit Location 

0. 217 

Viewing Hole 

A LED's 

TOP SECRET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

...... 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

w5 Leading + w5 Lagging 

c -+ c = 0.0855 + ~-n~~~~~~~n~~~~ 

Use of the smear image in analyzing system performance is discussed in Part 2, 

Section 4. 

The smear slit image on the 9 film (interframe position mark side) is specifically 

designed for high-mode analysis. 

The image is a double exposure as above produced by leading and lagging apertures 

with the following widths: 

where: ws 

(1) 

n 

w 

n 

w2 

ws 

(2) 

n 

Leading w

5 (1) 

n 

Lagging w

5 (

2) 

n 

= ws (1) 

n 

3 

(3/2) 

th is the leading smear slit width for n exposure slit position 

is the nth slider width opening 

is the 2nd slider width opening 

is the lagging smear slit width 

The center-to-center distance is determined by the following relationship: 

c -+ c = 0.0214 + 

w (1) + 

s 

n 

2 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840- RI-80 

Use of the smear image in analyzing system performance is discussed in Part 2, 

Section 4. 

2.2.2.2.4 VEM Alignment. Each VEM is aligned to its respective platen as 

follows: 

(1) The centerline of the slit aperture is centered on, and 

remains parallel to the platen longitudinal axis 

throughout its operating range. 

(2) The surface of the slit blade is nominally 0.0085 inch 

from the platen. 

A difference exists between the optical centerline and the fiducial centerline 

in each film subsystem. The difference is slight, 0.0405 inch for the 9 VEM 

and 0.009 inch for the 5 VEM, but should be included when analyzing returned 

photography. 

2.2.2.3 Focus Adjust Mechanism. The focus adjust mechanisms (9 and 5) control 

the focusing function in the PPS/DP EAC by positioning the platens at the 

required focus setting. The FAM moves the entire pivot frame assembly about 

its two pivot flexures through the use of an eccentric drive (the FAM 

gearbox) as the third frame support point (see Figure 3.2-33). 

Focus adjustment is of two types: 

(1) Slant Range Compensation (SRC) - which is a closed 

loop system with platen position determined by the 

four most significant bits of the commanded filmdrive-speed. 

(2) Nominal Platen Adjustment (NPA) - which is an open loop 

system used to compensate for image plane shifts from 

factory setting as determined through focus detector 

subsystem data or analysis of film from SRV 1. The 

NPA also is used to compensate for varying thicknesses of 

film and in performing special system experiments. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Cont ro I System On I y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

.. 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

IOP S!CREl G 

NOTE: Pivot frames shown 

~ 

. 

N 

I 

°' °' 

in proper relationship 

for the Z direction, 

separated in the X 

direction for clarity. 

Thennistor IMP 5061 

(Opposite Side) 

Film Guidance 1 ~ 

Rollers 

SRC 

SRC Motor 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Pivot Flexure 

I 

' 

'\ 

I 

/ 

/ 

I 

I; 

I 

ic>l\\ 

l£11 \ _,_, ' 

' 

9 PlVOT FRAME 

" 

VEM Mounting Pad 

Focus Sensor 

Mounting Pad 

Platen 

'\~ 

\ 

I 

J 

I 

VEM Mounting Pad 

Eccentric Drive 

Spring 

Instrumentation 

Potentiometers 

SRC Motor 

SRC 

Eccentric 

Drive 

VEM Mounting 

Pads 

Film Guidance 

Rollers 

~ 

FPL LE 

Motor /Encoder 

Housing 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

@ 

Instrurnentati011 

Potentiometers 

FAM Gearbox 

Spring 

Thermistor ~ IMP 5060 

Pivot Point 

Pivot Flexure 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

S P !VOT FRAME BIF-008 Vehicle 

Coordinates 

_,~_,, ~ -Z 

Figure 3.2-33. 9 and 5 Pivot Frame Assemblies 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

The SRC system provides 16 discrete steps, moving the platen 0.0045 inch in 

15 increments of 0.0003 inch each. Step 10 is at the factory best-focus 

position (or at best focus as adjusted by the NPA subsystem) and step 1 

is +0.0027 inch from there (positive reference: toward the Ross corrector). 

Adjustment occurs at the rate of 4 steps within a maximum time of 0.20 second. 

The NPA subsystem covers a range of 0.024 inch centered at factory best focus, 

with a step granularity of 0.0001 inch. The two available NPA drive modes 

produce different rates of travel; 5 steps per second in the primary mode and 

1 step in 0.8 second in the backup mode. 

System redundancy is achieved through the use of two drive motors, allowing 

the NPA system to be used as a backup for the SRC system, if necessary. 

Complete electrical redundancy is provided in the drive circuit for the NPA 

system. Dual springs are used at the attachment of the gearbox and pivoting 

frame to remove any system backlash. 

Electronic control circuits for the two FAM drives are located in their 

respective camera electronics assemblies. For a description of these units 

and the operational characteristics of the FAM mechanisms, refer to 

Subsection 2.5.4. 

2.2.2.3.1 FAM Gearbox. The FAM gearbox assembly, illustrated in Figures 

3.2-34 and 3.2-35, consists of a mechanical gear differential driven by the 

NPA stepper motor and the SRC ac motor. The output of the differential 

drives the instrumentation potentiometers and a worm gear that meshes with 

a sector gear attached to the pivot frame eccentric drive. Both the NPA 

and SRC motors incorporate mechanical holding brakes to prevent motion when 

the other is driving. The gearbox has mechanical stops at each side of the 

sector gear limiting the total focus adjustment to 0.024 inch. The two 

gearboxes mount to the camera housing as shown previously in Figure 3.2-22. 

3.2-67 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

...... 

IUI"' ;')C\..IU:I G 

V-1 

N 

I 

°' 00 

Instrumentation· 

Potentiometers, 

Coarse 

Hand I e vi a BY EM AN 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

FRONT VIEW 

Encoder 

Pivot Frame 

Eccentric 

Figure 3,2-34. Focus Adjust Mechanism Gearbox 

BACK VIEW 

Instrumentation 

Potentiometers, 

Fine 

G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

...... 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

V1 

. 

N 

I 

°' <.O

Hand! e vi a BY EM AN 

Con tro I System On I y 

G 

SRC ENCODER 

132T 

NPA. MOTOR______,--__., 

SRC 

12T 

MOTOR 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80. 

;PLATEN POSITION COARSE POTENTIOMETER 

/ r,m 5026 !9) 

/ IMP 5052 I 5) I 

I 

;-----.--PLf..~EN POSITION COARSE POTENTIOMETER 

IMP 5031 19) 

IMP 5J54l5) 

~"'-DIVOT FRAME ECCENTRIC DRIVE 

(J.0391~JCH OFFSET) 

DOUBLE THREAD 

?'.'\TEN PJSITION Fi NE POTENTIOMETER 

iMC' 5025 191 

IMP 505 (5) 

PLATE\I POSIT!ON FINE POTENTIOMETER 

IMP 5030 19) 

IMP 5053 (5) 

Figure 3.2-35. Focus Adjust Mechanism Gear Train 

TOP SECRET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

The 5 and 9 subsystem dimensions from the pivot point of the flexures to the 

platen, and from the pivot point to the gearbox-drive shaft are in the proper 

proportion to allow use of the same gearbox design for both, and are as follows: 

(1) Pivot point to platen 

centerline 

(2) Pivot point to drive 

shaft 

9 Subs stem 

(inc 

5.080 

11.178 

5 Subsystem 

(inches) 

2.830 

6.228 

2.2.2.3.2 Pivot Frame Flexures. The transverse circular pivoting flexures 

supporting the pivot frames require no lubrication and have no contacting 

(rolling, sliding, etc.) surfaces. The gradual necking-down keeps stress 

concentrations to a minimum, and alignment difficulties are virtually eliminated by accurate machining of the circular cutouts. The flexures are attached 

to machined pads in the camera housing. 

At the nominal factory focus position (set to best focus for an 87.5 nmi 

slant range), the 9 and 5 platens are in line with the optical centerline. 

The pivoting motion of focus adjustment and behavior of the flexures introduce an error in the alignment which reaches a maximum of 2.9 x 10- 4 inches 

in the 9 subsystem and 5 x 10-4 inches in the 5 subsystem at the extremes 

of travel. The total focus error introduced is not considered since it is 

accounted for by calibration. 

2.2.2.3.3 FAM Instrumentation. The platen position instrumentation in each 

subsystem consists of two dual, concentric rotary potentiometers geared to 

the worm drive shaft (reference Figure 3.2-35). The four potentiometers 

produce redundant, fine and coarse platen position signals. The coarse 

potentiometers cover a range of 0.024 inch in approximately 350 degrees of 

rotation. The fine potentiometers rotate approximately 12.4 times for one 

3.2-70 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAH 

Control Sys tern On I y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

revolution of the coarse, producing several voltage cycles over the complete 

range of platen travel. Processing instrumentation for all eight monitors is 

located in the camera housing. The points are assigned as follows: 

9 Subsystem 

Platen Position, Fine 

Platen Position, Coarse 

5 Subsystem 

Platen Position, Fine 

Platen Position, Coarse 

2.3 Film Path Distances 

IMPs 

5025 and 5030 

5026 and 5031 

5051 and 5033 

5052 and 5054 

Figure 3.2-36 illustrates the overall film path of the PPS/DP EAC listing path 

lengths for each segment and diameters for each roller. Table 3.2-4 

summarizes the most pertinent distances for quick reference. 

2.4 Operational Description 

Operation of the 9 x 5 dual platen camera and film handling subsystem can be 

separated into two cycles; a photographic cycle where unexposed film is transferred from the supply side of the looper, exposed in the camera, and returned 

to the take-up side of the looper, and a take-up cycle where the exposed film 

is transferred from the take-up side of the looper to the take-up spool while 

the supply spool simultaneously refills the supply side of the looper with 

fresh film. Operation in the strip mode, (or any photographic activity which 

causes the supply side of the looper to empty) results in performing a take-up 

cycle while a photographic cycle is in progress. A simplified operational 

schematic is shown in Figure 3.2-37. 

The following is a brief discussion of a photographic cycle and the 9 takeup and 5 take-up cycles. For more detailed information, refer to the 

control electronics description: the film control electronics (9 take-up 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008-W-C-019840-RI-80 

This page intentionally left blank. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle v1 a BY EMAN 

Control System On\ y 
I 

' 

\ 

\ 

\ 

I 

' ' 

I I 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

, I 

1 ' 

_,,-~ 

I 

I 

I 

I 

1 

,_,,,,,,,,,,,,, ____ ,,~J 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 
)> 

"O 

"O a------

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

I\) 

~~ 

I\) 

«TA 

ST 30 - Yn.OCITY !1Uf$0R lllOU!f\ 

ruu. 

!.<TE~~ 

Fl.M QlWl!t!TT 

Platen Diameter ~ 3.500 inches 

(both cases] 

,. PLA':'£N 

Vf:!.C(.;tr S!l'ffiOR l.lO\..lU 

MEH:A!M& l.lO\..ttM r. .. 1111 ilONlfttT 

Figure 3.2-36. PPS/DP EAC Film Path Distances 

5-inch Supply 

_£ist. No •. ~ L~ngth. 

l. SUP-1 4.424 

SUP-1 6.914 

2. 1-2 1.699 

1-2 6. 721 

3. 2-3 2.482 

2-3 7.010 

4. 3-4 10.610 

3-4 10.681 

*S. 4-5 1. 928 

4-5 9.428 

*6. 5-6 1. 928 

5-6 9. 428 

*7. 6-7 1. 928 

6-7 9.428 

*8. 7-8 1. 928 

7-8 9.428 

*9. 8-9 1.928 

8-9 9.428 

*10. 9-10 1.928 

9-10 9.428 

11. 10-11 6.584 

12. 11-12 6.690 

13. 12-13 7.902 

14. 13-14 8.766 

15. 14-PL 5,440 

.. "'--~--·-·· 

+ Mechanical For electrical 

subtract 0. the maximum 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

s O's, 

I\) 

s~'s, --

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
.!!.&!L 

124 

114 

,gg 

'21 

82 

10 

10 

81 

28 

28 

28 

28 

28 

28 

?8 

: 8 

: 8 

:3 

'8 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. -

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

co 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

~ For elec!rical om the max1mwn. 

I\) 

:::::;: For electrical 

.j:>. m the maximum 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

...... 

5 FILM SUBSYSTEM 

5-inch T/U 1 

Dist. No. Rollers Length 

16. 

17. 

18. 

19. 

20. 

+21. 

+22. 

+23. 

-1-24. 

+25. 

-1-26. 

27. 

28. 

29. 

30. 

31. 

32, 

33. 

34. 

35. 

36, 

DR-15 

15-16 

16-17 

17-18 

18-19 

19-20 

19-20 

20-21 

20-21 

21-22 

21-22 

22-23 

22-23 

23-24 

23-24 

24-25 

24-25 

25-26 

26-27 

27-28 

28-29 

29-30 

30-31 

31-32 

32-33 

33-34 

34-T/U 

34-T/U 

5.440 

11.576 

7.090 

6.240 

3.688 

I. 774 

9.274 

1. 928 

9.428 

l. 928 

9.428 

1. 928' 

9.428 

1. 928 

9.428 

2.634 

10.134 

5.964 

12.464 

6. 789 

7.693 

2.036 

6 .• 652 

48.617 

30.436 

28.898 

11.163 

11.839 

stops, add 0.280 to the minimum; 

stops, add 1.087 to the minimum; 

5-inch T/U 2 

D_ist._ No. ~ L_fillgth 

37 

38. 

39. 

40, 

41. 

42, 

43. 

28-35 

35-36 

36-37 

37.38 

38-39 

39-40 

40-T/U 

40-T/U 

4.564 

1. 270 

4.359 

2.071 

21. 699 

35,552 

11. 163 

11.839 

Roller Diameters 

5 Subsystem 

Roller No. Dia(in,) 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

Supply 

Core 

T/U Core 

o. 750 

! 

0.750 

0.800 

0.800 

0.750 

0,750 

1.166 

1. 166 

1.166 

0.800 

0.800 

0.750 

0.750 

0.750 

1.166 

3.00 

l. 43 

9.5-inch Supply 

Dist. No. Rollers Length 

1. 

2. 

3. 

*4. 

*S. 

*6. 

*7. 

*8. 

*9. 

10. 

11. 

12. 

13. 

14. 

SUP-1 

SUP-1 

1-2 

1-2 

2-3 

2-3 

3-4 

3-4 

4-5 

4-5 

5-6 

5-6 

6-7 

6-7 

7-8 

7-8 

8-9 

8-9 

9-10 

0-11 

11-12 

12-13 

13-PL 

6.709 

11. 755 

2.735 

7.624 

3.188 

7_,901 

2. 746' 

12.831 

4. 071 

14. 071 

4.071 

14. 071 

4.071 

14.071 

4.071 

14.071 

2.990 

12.990 

4.347 

20.222 

22.339 

5.887 

5.460 

9 FIIM SUBSYSTEM 

9.5-inch T/U 1 

Dist. No. Rollers Length 

15. 

16. 

17. 

18. 

19. 

+20. 

+21. 

+22. 

+23. 

+24. 

+25. 

26. 

27. 

28. 

29. 

30. 

31. 

32. 

33, 

34. 

35. 

36, 

37. 

PL-14 

14-15 

15-16 

16-17 

17-18 

18-19 

18-19 

19-20 

19-20 

20-21 

20-21 

21-22 

21-22 

22-23 

22-23 

23-24 

23-24 

24-25 

25-26 

26-27 

27-28 

28-29 

29-30 

30-31 

31-32 

32-33 

33-34 

34-35 

35-T/U 

35-T /U 

5.460 

8.699 

21.584 

16.580 

16.104 

3.981 

13.981 

4.071 

14.071 

4.071 

14. 071 

4.071 

14.071 )> 

4.071 "O 

14.071 ~ 

3.678 ~ 

13.678 CD 

22.911 c. 18.456 O' 

..., 6.580 ;:a 

CD 

22.652 ~ 

CJ) 

5 .455 ~ 

I\) 

5.610 0 

8.107 

1.935 

86.766 

2.115 

5 .072 

3.664 

7.365 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

*-l>lechanical stops. For electrical stops, add 1.083 to the minimum; 

subtract 2.783 from the maximum, 

.,. Mechanical stgps. For electrical stops, add 2.7S3 to the minimum; 

subtract 1.083 from the maximum. 
9 FILM SUBSYSTEM BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

9.5-inch Supply 9.5-inch T/U 1 .9.5-inch T/U 2 

;Lngth Dist. No. Rollers Length Dist. No. Rollers Length Dist. No. Rollers Length 

.564 1. SUP-1 6.709 15. PL-14 5.460 38. 30-36 4.639 

.270 SUP-1 11. 755 

. 359 2. 1-2 2. 735 16. 14-15 8.699 39 . 36-37 1.306 

071 1-2 7.624 

.699 3. 2-3 3.188 17. 15-16 21. 584 40. 37-38 6.301 

552 2-3 7.901 

163 *4. 3-4 2. 746 18. 16-17 16.580 41. 38-39 7.863 

839 3-4 12.831 ' *5. 4-5 4.071 19. 17-18 16 .104 42. 39-40 37.948 

4-5 14. 071 

*6. 5-6 4.071 +20. 18-19 3.981 43. 40-41 2.115 

5-6 14.071 18-19 13.981 

*7. 6-7 4.071 +21. 19-20 4.071 44. 41-42 5.072 

~s 6-7 14. 071 19-20 14. 071 

*8. 7-8 4.071 +22. 20-21 4.071 45. 42-T/U 3.664 

)n.) 7-8 14.071 20-21 14. 071 42-T/U 7.365 

;o *9, 8-9 2.990 +23. 21-22 4.071 

8-9 12.990 21-22 14. 071 )> 

)> 10. 9-10 4.347 +24. 22-23 4.071 Roll er Diameters "O 

"O 22-23 14.071 9 Subsystem "O 

..., "O 11. 0-11 ·20. 222 +25. 23-24 3, 678 Roller No. Dia(in.) 0 ..., < 0 23-24 13,678 < 1 1.000 CD 

CD 26. 24-25 22. 911 l ! c. 

c. 12. 11-12 22.339 27. 25-26 18.456 

-

0 

- 16 1.000 ..., 0 J 

..., 13. 12-13 5.887 28. 26-27 6.580 ;:a 

;:a 17· 0.750 CD 

CD 14. 13- PL 5.460 29. 27-28 22.652 18 

1.0r 

CD 

CD Q) 

Q) l CJ) 

CJ) 30. 28-29 5.455 CD 

CD 29 1.000 I\) 

I\) 31. 29-30 5.610 0 

0 30 0.800 ...... 

-J ...... 32. 30-31 -J 8.107 31 1,800 --

0 

-- I\) 

0 33. 31-32 1. 935 32 .. 000 

I\) --...... 

-- .j:>. ...... 33 l .166 

.j:>. 34. 32-33 86.766 () 

() 34 1.000 0 

0 35. 33-34 2.115 35 0.750 0'1 

0 0'1 co 0 

co 36. 34-35 5.072 36 0.800 -J 

I\) 

-J 

I\) 37 0.800 I\) 

I\) 37. 35-T/U 3.664 

35-T/U 7.365 38 1.000 

39 1. 000 

,.- · Mechanic-aC-stops. For electrical stops, add 1.083 to the minimum; 40 1.166 

subtract 2.733 from the maximum. 41 1.000 

+ Mechanical st~ps. For electrical stops, add 2.733 to the minimum; 42 0.750 

subtract 1.083 from the maximum. 3.2-73/3.2-74 

Supply 6.00 

Core 

T/U Core 3.93 reF SEEHT __£_ 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008-, W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-4 

FILM PATH LENGTHS 

Distance (1) 9 (inches) 5 (inches) 

Splicer to SRV 1 103 131 

T/U Spool (2) 

Splicer to SRV 2 66 78 

T/U Spool (3) 

Slit to SRV 1 298 214 

T/U Spool 

Slit to SRV 2 260 159 

T/U Spool 

Slit to Film Quantity 109 85 

Metering Roller 

(1) Assumes full T/U spool; looper carriage at supply side 

electrically full position 

(2) Assumes 3.5 inches from cutting point to output roller 

of splicer mechanism 

(3) From approximate splicing point 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e v1 a BY EM AN 

C:Ontrol System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 tJ.l ..., . ;:a N 

CD I 

CD -J 

Q) ()\ 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET G 

.....; 

0 (/) H U 

.μ •rl 

~ ~ 0 0 

U H 

Storage Looper 

.μ 

s t) 

0 Q) 

HM 

~ u.J 

Take-up Side Supply Side 

Carriage 

T/U Cycle...,.___ --- Photographic 

Take-up 

Motor 

* Storage looper empty 

and full carriage 

positions referenced 

to supply side. 

Cycle 

Empty* 

Tension 

Empty- -

Approaching; 

Full- - - --

FullBIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Supply Spool 

Supply Motor 

0---

Supply Brake (s) 

Control 

Electronics 

To Take-up Motor 

Figure 3.2-37. Film Handling Operational Schematic 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

cycle), the film handling electronics (5 take-up cycle), and the frequency 

phase lock loop electronics (photographic cycle), which follow this subsection. 

2.4.1 Simplified Photographic Cycle 

Performance of a photographic cycle requires operational power (OP) to be 

ON for the commanded subsystem(s). Prior to beginning film motion, the 

proper exposure slit opening is selected and the roll, crab, and stereo 

positions set. Sufficient transition time must be allowed for setup, or 

image quality could be degraded. 

Film drive (9 and/or 5) is started by execution of the 14V WORD* command, 

containing the 10 film-drive speed bits. The film-drive speed, selected 

for correct image motion compensation, controls the FPLLE and dictates the 

correct focus position (slant range compensation step) for the platen.** 

I. If the SRC subsystem is unable to reach ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 

the proper platen position in this 300 millisecond period, degradation will 

result until the platen is positioned correctly and settled. To avoid this, 

the 14V WORD can be commanded with operational power OFF prior to the photographic period. No film motion will occur, but the SRC subsystem will begin 

moving the platen to the desired focus position allowing additional drive time 

over and above the normal 300-millisecond film start-up period. Commanding 

OP ON will initiate the normal photographic sequence. Normally, however, the 

transition will be completed prior to the required film drive ON time. The 

14V WORD or 13V WORD OFF command is then executed, leaving the subsystem ready 

for a photographic sequence. 

*14V WORD signifies a 14 variable bit command word. Refer to Part 3, 

Section 9 for further explanation. 

**The SRC step picked is correct only in the normal film-drive 

speed range. 

3. 2-77 

Tr~ Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EM AN 

Cont ro I Sys tern On I y 

25X1 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Interlocks exist in the film control subsystems to prevent image degradation 

as much as practical. Any vibrational disturbance in the vehicle may affect 

platen drive smoothness. To avoid this, execution of the 14V WORD command 

implicitly removes power from both the 9 and 5 slit mechanisms and inhibits 

both the 9 and 5 take-up cycles. The take-up inhibit will be overridden by 

either of two occurrences to prevent damage to the system: 

(1) A low-tension condition in the film handling subsystem 

(monitored by the tension arm) or, 

(2) The supply side of the storage looper reaching its electrically empty trip point. 

The slit mechanism inhibit is not automatically overridden. However, slit 

motion can be resumed by recommanding the desired slit position. 

While simultaneous operation of both 9 and 5 film subsystems is possible, 

only one film-drive speed is available with the 14V WORD. Consequently, 

only one of the film subsystems may be optimized in terms of image motion 

compensation, as discussed in Section 3, Part 2. 

Motion of film during the photographic cycle can best be understood by 

reviewing the film handling operational diagram (Figure 3.2-37). Rotating 

the platen pulls film from the supply side of the storage looper, past the 

exposure slit, and returns it to the take-up side. The looper carriage 

moves continuously to the right as film is transferred from one side to 

the other. Since an equal amount of film i? replaced on the take-up side 

as is removed from the supply side, no film motion will occur elsewhere 

in the system as long as the take-up cycle remains inhibited. Since film 

tension remains essentially constant, no film is transferred to, or from, 

the tension looper. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BI F-008- _w_-c_-_0_19_8_4_0_-R_I_-_s 0 

2.4.2 Simplified Take-up Cycle 

A take-up cycle (for either the 9 or 5 system) is initiated whenever the supply 

side of the storage looper reaches its electrically empty limit, or a 9/5 TAKEUP ENABLE command is given and the looper carriage is not at the electrically full 

position.** Once begun, the take-up cycle will be stopped either by the supply side of 

the storage looper tripping the opposite limit switch (electrically full), or the 

film drive being commanded ON in either film subsystem, provided the looper supply 

side is not electrically empty. If the take-up cycle was initiated while the film 

drive was on, it will continue until the supply side of the looper has been completely refilled, unless a repeat film drive ON command is given while the looper 

carriage is between its two electrical limits.* 

Should the tension arm reach its electrically full limit (low tension) with the 

film system quiescent (a take-up cycle not in progress), the take-up spool will 

begin driving, and continue until the tension has returned to satisfactory levels. 

This condition will not initiate a full take-up cycle. A high tension signal from 

the tension arm will release the supply brake but will not cause the motor to begin 

driving while the take-up cycle is inhibited. 

For the 9 subsystem, the take-up cycle is performed the same whether it is explicitly commanded, or caused by an empty supply side on the storage looper. In 

the 5 subsystem, the method of performing a take-up cycle depends on its cause. 

Commanding 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE initiates a cycle similar to the 9 subsystem.** 

However, the 5 subsystem incorporates a backup mode of operation which is initiated when the supply side of the 5 storage looper reaches its electrically 

empty limit. This mode uses only the supply brake, rather than the brake and 

drive motor to control film tension, requiring the take-up motor to pull film 

from the supply spool as it rolls in exposed film. 

*A T/U cycle (emptying an electrically full looper and coming to rest) requires 

3.0 seconds maximum (3.5 seconds in the 9 subsystem when the voltage is less 

than 24.5 vdc and there is less than 500 or more than 4000 feet of film on the 

T/U spool). 

**When more than one 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE command is given without an intermediate 

TAKE-UP INHIBIT (14V WORD) command, only the first 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE will be 

effective. This is due to an interaction between the command processor and the 

film handling electronics. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

The take-up spool drive and the supply brake in either subsystem employ 

digital closed-loop systems for operation, while the supply drive motor is 

controlled by an analog closed-loop system. The take-up drive is turned 

ON by those signals which initiate a take-up cycle (looper supply side 

empty; 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE command), or by the tension arm encoder low-tension signal. The drive is turned OFF by the end of the take-up cycle 

(looper supply side full; film drive ON command being given), or by the 

tension arm returning to an acceptable range, if a high-tension condition 

was the initiating factor. 

Supply drive in the 9 subsystem, or in the 5 subsystem for primary mode of 

operation, is controlled in response to an analog voltage signal from the 

associated tension arm position potentiometer. A comparator circuit in 

the control electronics (FCE or FHE) provides forward or reverse drive, as 

needed, to maintain the tension arm at its nominal rest position. 

The supply brake is released by energizing the brake coil circuitry, which 

is controlled by the tension looper reaching the electrically empty state 

(high tension), by the storage looper reaching its electrically full position, or by the 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE command being given while the looper 

carriage is between the empty and full positions. In the backup mode of 

operation, the 5 supply brake is normally released and is then engaged 

whenever the tension arm encoder reaches the tension looper APPROACHING 

FULL position. 

Film motion during a take-up cycle is somewhat complex and coverage of all 

possible situations will not be included here. What follows are three 

simplified descriptions; the first is typical of the 9 subsystem take-up 

cycle, the second is typical of the 5 subsystem primary mode cycle, and 

the third describing the 5 backup mode. 

3.2-80 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

At the beginning of the take-up cycle, the 9 take-up drive is turned ON and 

the supply brake disengaged. As the take-up runs, it pulls film from the 

take-up side of the storage looper, causing the supply side to begin filling 

at the same rate (the looper carriage in Figure 3.2-37 moves to the left). 

No film motion occurs in the camera unless a photograph is being taken 

simultaneously. Initially, fresh film is acquired from the tension looper 

as the supply has not started moving. This results from a built-in delay 

in the control circuitry incorporated to lessen system perturbations. 

If the supply drive was immediately enabled, the initial position of the 

tension looper might be such that the supply would begin to drive backwards. 

Then, as the combination of a reverse supply drive and the take-up drive 

emptied the tension looper, the supply would have to reverse itself and begin to run forward. 

Instead, by the end of the delay period (0.2 second), the tension arm should 

be moving towards high tension and the supply will immediately start in the 

forward direction, attempting to match the take-up and supply velocities by 

responding to tension arm displacement. The take-up and supply continue to 

run until the digital closed-loop system is satisfied by a full supply side 

on the storage looper, or until a film drive ON command is given in either 

the 9 or 5 subsystem. Any time the bidrive circuit is not supplying power 

to the motor (either during or between take-up cycles), shunt switches in 

the circuit are closed to provide dynamic braking of the spool. When the 

take-up motor is turned OFF, a full supply spool will tend to overshoot the 

nominal tension state. Because a slightly, below normal tension condition 

is not harmful, this is an acceptable condition. 

If the film drive is turned ON during a take-up cycle, the take-up drive 

will be disabled and the take-up spool dynamically braked. The supply drive 

will remain enabled and the brake disengaged for a maximum of 0.5 second 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 -------. 

after the command to allow the system to reach nominal tension. In a similar 

fashion, when the take-up is stopped due to the supply side of the storage 

looper being filled, the supply drive remains enabled and the brake coil is 

energized for up to 1.5 seconds to reach nominal tension. During either 

period, an approaching full tension looper condition will engage the supply 

brake to assist the motor in stopping the spool. When the forward velocity 

of the spool becomes negative (sensed by tension arm rate of movement), the 

supply torque motor is turned OFF to prevent it from driving against the engaged brake. 

As the spool empties, its inertia is reduced and it can be stopped by action 

of the motor alone. Under this condition, the approaching full encoder 

position is not reached, and the brake will not enter into the process of 

decelerating the spool. The supply will reverse until the tension looper 

returns to the rest position. Power is removed when the FCE delay time is 

reached. 

In terms of film motion, the 5 subsystem primary take-up cycle is similar to 

the 9 subsystem. However, the 5 subsystem incorporates only one delay timer 

circuit in the FHE. The small mass of the supply spool (relative to the 9 

supply) does not affect the performance of the subsystem to any great extent 

in the primary take-up mode. 

At the beginning of the 5 cycle, the supply brake is released, and the supply 

and take-up drives enabled. The take-up begins transferring film from the 

take-up side of the storage looper while the supply side fills at the same 

rate. The supply is driven in response to the absolute position and rate 

of change of the tension arm, attempting to maintain nominal tension by 

matching the supply and take-up rates. Whenever the supply motor is not being 

driven (either during or between take-up cycles), and power is being provided 

to the FHE (5 OP), both shunt switches in the motor bidrive are closed, providing dynamic braking of the spool. 

3.2-82 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

When the take-up cycle is stopped, either by the supply side of the storage 

looper becoming full or by commanding film drive ON in either subsystem 

(assuming the carriage is between its empty and full limits), power is removed from the take-up motor and the supply brake is applied. The supply drive 

remains enabled for an additional 0.1 second to assist in stopping the supply 

and adjusting film tension. Even though it is not energized, the brake is 

not engaged during the initial part of this period due to the time constant 

of the holding coil and the mechanical behavior of the assembly. The brake 

will be fully engaged approximately 70 milliseconds after power has been 

turned OFF. 

The backup mode of operation for the 5 take-up cycle depends solely on the 

take-up drive to move film throughout the subsystem. The backup mode is 

actuated whenever the storage looper supply side becomes electrically empty. 

The take-up drive turns ON and begins transferring film from the take-up 

side of the looper to the take-up spool, as in the primary mode. However, 

since the supply drive is not enabled, the take-up drive must pull film from 

the supply to refill the looper while the supply brake is used to control 

film tension as much as possible. The brake coil is energized (brake released) whenever the tension arm encoder has not exceeded the tension arm 

APPROACHING FULL switching point. The brake is engaged as necessary during 

the cycle to slow the supply and to prevent an excess of film from being 

released into the 5 subsystem. The take-up drive is stopped and the supply 

brake is engaged when the storage looper has been refilled. Throughout the 

cycle, the shunt circuit in the supply bidrive is enabled, providing dynamic braking of the supply to aid in limiting supply spool acceleration 

rates. 

Even though the subsystem is operating in the backup mode, a high-tension 

condition during the cycle (tension looper electrically empty) will cause 

the primary mode brake-release coil to be energized with a consequent 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System On! y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

increase in the total supply-brake current as monitored by the 5 supplybrake current instrumentation sensor. 

The ON/OFF characteristic of the supply brake in the backup mode creates 

large tension excursions during the take-up cycle, introducing perturbations into the film handling subsystem and degrading any photographic 

activity that may be taking place. For this reason, it is generally desirable to command a TAKE-UP ENABLE before the looper reaches its empty 

state, allowing all take-up operations to be performed in the primary mode. 

2.5 9 x 5 Dual Platen Camera and Film Handling Subsystem Electronic 

Control Units 

Six electronic units are directly linked to the 9 x 5 camera and film 

handling subsystem; the two frequency phase lock loop electronics boxes 

(9 and 5), the two camera electronics assemblies (9 and 5), the film control electronics (9), and the film handling electronics (5). Each interfaces with components of the subsystem and with other control units of the 

PPS/DP EAC including the command processor, the power monitor and control 

unit, and the instrumentation processor. Although it is not discussed 

here, the initiator electronics unit is also involved with the film handling 

subsystem as it controls all pyrotechnic functions in the PPS/DP EAC and 

contains the circuitry which switches the take-up control power from T/U 1 

to T/U 2. 

2.5.1 Film Control Electronics 

The film control electronics, also known as the record control electronics 

(RCE), directs all functions related to handling of the 9.5-inch film between supply and take-up, exclusive of the platen drive. As such, it 

consists of power switches for the supply motor, the take-up motor, and the 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control System On\ y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

supply brake, a logic circuit to provide film handling control, and circuitry 

for instrumentation outputs. The FCE is part of a closed-loop control system 

in which the supply and take-up motors and supply brake are operated in response to feedback signals from the tension arm position transducers and the 

looper carriage position encoders. 

The unit is powered through the 9 operational power switch in the power monitor and control unit and receives commands from the command processor. 

Instrumentation outputs are directed to the instrumentation processor. 

2.5.l.l Film Control Electronics Unit. The FCE unit is mounted on the +Y 

side of the film supply enclosure in the supply electronics module (reference 

Part 3, Section 1). The unit is approximately 12" x 4.5" x 7", excluding 

mounting feet, and weighs approximately 9 pounds. Electrical interfaces 

with other PPS/DP EAC components occur through one 32-pin connector and one 

61-pin connector. 

2.5.1.2 FCE Logic Operation. Figure 3.2-38 is a logic diagram for the film 

control electronics. In addition to operational power and instrumentation 

power, the FCE receives input signals and generates output control signals 

as described below. 

2.5.1.2.1 FCE Logic Inputs. The FCE accepts the following feedback signals 

from the film handling subsystem, and commands from the CP: 

(1) Storage looper Supply Side Full and Supply Side Empty signals 

which are generated by separate mechanical encoders in the 

looper assembly, each of which provide redundant output 

signals. 

3.2-85 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

This page intentionally left blank. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Con tro 1 Sys tern On 1 y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

1 0P 5iC:Alil' ...lJ._ 

SIGNAL I ! RATE 

SCHMITT TRIGGER 

S/S T/U 

INHlB!T 

SUPPLY LOOP.ER 

EMPTY 

SUPPLY LOOPER -<I-cl 

FULL 

9/S T/U 

TYPICAL COMPARATOR OlITPUT 

IMP 

BRAKE 

T/U MOTOR DRIVE 

SH!JNT 

SWITCH 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

#2) 

ENABLE .r ~ (LOW 1ENSION) -::-

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

Figure 3.2-38. Film Control Electronics Logic Diagram 

3.2-87/3.2-88 

JO P 51ii<LAE-T _G_ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

Q; 

I\) I 

--· ...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

(2) Tension Looper Empty, Tension Loo er Near Full, Tension Looper 

~~~~~~}F~u~l}l~,~allind Ten on Looper Full signals that are 

generated y a multi-track mechanical encoder geared to the 

tension arm, producing redundant outputs for each signal; 

(3) An analog Tension Arm Error (displacement) signal generated 

by a potentiometer geared to the tension arm; 

(4) 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE and 9/5 TAKE-UP INHIBIT (implicit with 

14V WORD execution) commands that are sent directly from the 

command processor. 

2.5.1.2.2 FCE Logic Outputs. The logic output descriptions which follow are 

referenced to the logic diagram of Figure 3.2-38. 

(1) 9 Take-up ON* - 9 take-up motor power is supplied whenever: 

a. A storage looper Supply Side Empty signal is received; 

b. A 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE command is received and the looper 

supply side is not full (assuming a 9/5 TAKE-UP INHIBIT 

command was executed sometime following the previous 9/5 

TAKE-UP ENABLE); 

c. 9 operational power is commanded ON from an OFF state and 

the supply side of the looper is not full; 

d. A Tension Looper Full (low tension) signal is received; 

(2) 9 Take-up OFF - 9 take-up motor power is removed whenever; 

a. A storage looper Supply Side Full signal is received; 

b. A 9/5 TAKE-UP INHIBIT command is received and the Supply 

Side Empty signal is not present; 

c. The tension looper has returned to an acceptable range 

(only if the take-up was turned ON by a Tension Looper 

Full signal). 

*The 9 take-up will turn on briefly, jogging the film, whenever 9 OP is 

turned ON either by a 9 OP ON command or a redundant 9 OP OFF command 

(reference Part 3, Section 7). If the take-up side of the looper is not 

electrically empty, commanding 9 OP ON will initiate a take-up cycle just 

as if a TAKE-UP ENABLE command was given. 

T7_£ 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EMAH 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-OOB~W-C-019840-RI-80 

(3) 9 Supply Power ON - Power is provided to the supply motor bidri ve circuit at either of the following times: 

a. 0.2 second after a storage looper Supply Side Empty 

signal is received; 

b. 0.2 second after a 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE command is received, providing the looper supply side is not 

already full. 

(4) 9 Supply Power OFF - Power is removed from the supply drive under 

any of the following conditions: 

a. 0.5 second after a 9/5 Take-up Inhibit signal, provided 

the Supply Side Empty signal is not present, or, 

b. 1.5 seconds after 9 take-up power is turned OFF by a 

Supply Side Full signal, or, 

c. whenever the 9 take-up drive is OFF, a Tension Looper 

A roachin Full signal is received, and the velocity 

oft tension arm is less than or equal to zero (i.e., 

the supply is beginning to turn rearward). 

d. whenever a Tension Looper Near Full signal is received, 

the forward supply motor drive is disabled. 

e. whenever a Tension Looper Empty signal is received, the 

rearward supply motor drive is disabled. 

(5) 9 Supply Brake Released - The 9 supply brake is normally engaged. 

The brake release coil is energized only when: 

a. a Tension Looper Empty signal is received, or, 

b. the 9 supply motor is enabled (except for case 4c. where 

the supply drive remains enabled for a short time after 

the take-up is OFF and a Tension Looper Approaching Full 

signal is received during that period, applying the brake). 

2.5.1.3 Supply Motor Bidrive Control. Operation of the supply motor drive 

is a relatively complicated process which requires a rigorous explanation for 

clarity, beginning with the tension arm error signal processing circuitry. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Cont ro I Sys tern On 1 y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

The Tension Arm Error signal, an analog voltage proportional to tension arm 

position, is used by the FCE to produce a relative Tension Arm Displacement 

signal and an Arm Velocity (rate) signal. These two are then applied to an 

analog-to-pulse-width converter consisting of a summer amplifier, sawtooth 

generator, clamping circuit, and two differential comparators generating the 

forward and reverse supply drive (refer to Figure 3.2-38). 

The sawtooth-generator wave train is applied to the clamping circuit, producing two sawtooth outputs; one clamped above 7.5 volts, and one clamped 

below 7.5 volts. Each is then applied to a separate differential comparator. 

The summer amplifier combines the Tension Arm Displacement and Arm Velocity signals, producing a combined error signal relative to a 7.5-volt (zero error) 

level. The summer amplifier output is applied to the complementary inputs 

of both differential comparators. 

A pulse output of the forward comparator is developed for the duration of 

time that the summer amplifier output exceeds the upper-clamped sawtooth. 

Similarly, the rearward comparator produces a pulse for the duration of time 

the summer output is less than the low-clamped sawtooth (see Figure 3.2-39). 

The pulse width produced is proportional to the error signal level; i.e., 

proportional to the displacement and rate of change of the tension arm. The 

output of each comparator is applied to its respective forward or rearward 

drive circuit and thus the supply motor responds to forward or rearward 

pulses whose average value determines the power applied to the motor. 

To aid in stopping the high inertia of the 9 supply spool, the bidrive 

circuit shunt transistor switches are both ON (switches closed) when neither 

forward nor rearward drive power is applied. The motor is dynamically braked 

during this period, acting as a generator supplying power to the switch load. 

Rearward power will be applied during the stopping phase whenever the combined error signal so dictates. 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System On! y 
Forward Drive 

Comparator _ __,__..,./ 

Input 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Forward Drive Comparator Output 

-

BIF-OOS- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Summer Output for 

a Positive Error 

Rearward Drive 

Comparator 

Input 

Reference Level 

1---,---U:__-...,..-.x._-_,,....__.__--:it__._ __ ~.____ ( 7 . 5 V C 1 amp) 

NITTE: 

Forward Drive 

Comparator 

Input 

Comparator 

Input 

With Zero Error, 

Neither Comparator 

Supplies An Output. 

'I 

I I 

I I 

I I 

\_ Summer Output for 

a Negative Error 

I I Width is proportional 

I I

..,._ to displacement and 

rate of change of 

I I tension arm. 

Rearward Drive Comparator Output 

Figure 3.2-39. Clamp Circuit and Comparator Operation 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Early in a mission, while the supply spool is still relatively full, the 

supply brake may be needed to assist in stopping the spool after a take-up 

cycle. The brake will be applied if the tension looper near full position 

is encountered. A Schmitt trigger monitors the Tension Arm Error Rate 

signal and fires when it detects a positive rate (arm velocity is less than 

or equal to zero (looper emptying)). This signal is used by the control 

electronics to remove power from the supply motor if the take-up is OFF and 

a Tension Looper Approaching Full signal has been received. 

When beginning a take-up cycle, the displacement portion of the error signal 

is inhibited for 0.2 second. This is done in case the residual tension arm 

position from the previous cycle indicates a low-tension condition; in which 

instance the supply motor would try to remove film from the looper to restore 

tension while the take-up is removing film from the storage looper take-up 

side, resulting in a sudden high-tension condition. By blocking the supply 

drive circuit for 0.2 second, film tension can be increased smoothly by the 

T/U alone. Figure 3.2-40 illustrates this under the worst-case condition 

of a large supply load. 

2.5.1.4 FCE Instrumentation. The FCE monitors take-up motor and supply 

motor currents (IMPs 5267 and 5269 respectively) as well as brake current 

(IMP 5378) using dropping resistors in the power return lines. The signals 

are amplified to levels compatible with Digital Telemetry Unit (DTU) input 

requirements and transmitted to the DTU through the instrumentation processor. 

2.5.2 Film Handling Electronics 

The film handling electronics, also known as the record handling electronics 

(RHE), is the counterpart in the 5 film handling subsystem to the film control electronics of the 9 film handling subsystem. The FHE is an integral 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle v1 a BYEt-iAN 

Control Sys tern On l y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

High-Tension Limit 

r 

Nominal - .__ __ _ /~ 

I '--t\ 

Residual 

from r 

Previous 

Cycle t 

t 0.2 Sec T/U \ 

Motor \ 

OFF \ Magnitude of 

Tension Error 

Unblocked 

\ 

\ 

"=---

0.0 Sec t 

Supply Motor 

Inhibited 

Brake Engaged 

Low-Tension Limit 

Time --111'-

(Typ i cal Tension Under Large Supply Loads) 

Figure 3.2-40. Film Tension vs Elapsed Time 

3. 2·-94 

TOP SE ET __Q_ 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

_G_ 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

----------------

part of the 5 subsystem, operating the 5 take-up and supply motors and the 

5 brake, in response to feedback signals from the 5 looper carriage position 

encoder and 5 tension arm encoder and potentiometer, and in response to 

vehicle commands. 

In addition to film handling components, the FHE interfaces electrically 

with the power monitor and control unit, the command processor, the instrumentation processor, and the initiator electronics unit. Application of 5 

operational power, switched in the PM and C, energizes all circuits within 

the FHE, exclusive of instrumentation circuitry, and prepares the unit to 

operate in conjunction with the balance of the 5 subsystem components. Instrumentation power is supplied whenever either digital telemetry unit is 

commanded ON. 

2.5.2.1 Film Handling Electronics Unit. The FHE is located in the supply 

electronics module on the +Y side of the film supply enclosure (reference 

Part 3, Section 1). The unit measures approximately 12" x 4.3" x 7", excluding mounting feet, and weighs slightly less than 10.5 pounds. A 32-pin 

connector and a 61-pin connector constitute the electrical interface with 

other PPS/DP EAC components. 

2.5.2.2 FHE Logic Operation. Figure 3.2-41 is a simplified logic diagram 

for the film handling electronics. The FHE contains logic circuitry for 

two modes of operation. In the primary mode, the supply drive functions as 

the major means for proper maintenance of film tension. In the backup mode, 

the supply drive is not powered, and film tension is controlled through the 

supply brake, tension arm, and take-up motor interaction. The logic input 

signals, and the control signals generated, are described below. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

This page intentionally left blank. 

3.2-96 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

----------------- ··----

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control Sys tern On l y 
0 

co 

H ' 

"' 

..,. 

0 ' 

co 

"' .... 

0 

u ' 

4 

g ' 

.1. 

iii 

i 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

• 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

<DI 

I 

00 

m 

N ' 

,..; 

'-" Q) 

N ' 

,,, 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.5.2.2.l FHE Logic Input Signals. The FHE receives the following 

feedback signals from the film handling subsystem and commands from the CP: 

(1) Storage looper Supply Side Full and Supply Side Empty signals which 

are generated by a multi-track mechanical encoder on the 5 looper 

assembly (redundant outputs are provided for Supply Side Full and 

Supply Side Empty signals in the primary mode and a separate pair 

of redundant outputs for a Supply Side Full signal in the backup 

mode); 

(2) Tension Looper Empty, Tension Looper Approaching Full, and 

Tension Looper Full signals provided by a dual (redundant) 

channel mechanical encoder geared to the 5 tension arm; 

(3) An analog Tension Arm Error (displacement) signal from a 

potentiometer geared to the tension arm; 

(4) 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE and 9/5 TAKE-UP INHIBIT (implicit with 

14V WORD execution) commands from the command processor. 

2.5.2.2.2 FHE Logic Outputs. The explanations which follow are referenced 

to the logic diagram of Figure 3.2-41. 

(1) Take-up ON - 5 take-up motor power is supplied whenever: 

a. A 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE command is received and a Supply Side 

Full signal is not present* (the looper carriage is between 

the empty and full states); 

b. 5 operational power is commanded ON from an OFF state and the 

supply side of the looper is not full; 

c. A storage looper Su Side signal is received, 

causing a switchover to the up mode of operation; 

d. A Tension Looper Full (low tension) signal is received. 

*9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE will not be executed unless a 9/5 TAKE-UP INHIBIT command 

has been executed following the last 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE. 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

(2) 5 Take-up OFF - 5 take-up motor power is removed whenever: 

a. a storage looper Supply Side Full signal is present; 

b. a 9/5 TAKE-UP INHIBIT command is received (14V WORD), and 

a Supply Side Empty signal is not present; 

c. the Tension Looper Full signal is removed (only if the 

take-up drive was initiated by a Tension Looper Full 

signal). 

(3) 5 Supply Power ON* - Power is supplied to the 5 supply motor 

bidrive circuit (which controls the actual supply drive in 

response to tension arm feedback signals) under the following 

condition: 

a. 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE is commanded and neither the storage 

looper Supply Side Full nor Supply Side Empty signals are 

present. 

(4) 5 Supply power OFF - The 5 supply bidrive circuit power is removed as follows: 

a. 0.1 second after a 9/5 TAKE-UP INHIBIT command (14V WORD) 

is received, or, 

b. 0.1 second after the 5 take-up drive is turned OFF by a 

Supply Side Full signal. 

(5) 5 Supply Brake Released - The supply brake is normally engaged. 

The brake release coil is energized whenever: 

a. a Tension Looper Empty signal is present; 

b. the supply motor bidrive is enabled, except during the 0.1 

second delay prior to turning the supply bidrive power OFF 

(see 4a and 4b above); 

*The 5 supply will turn briefly, jogging the film,whenever 5 operational power 

turns on, whether due to a 5 OP ON command, or a redundant 5 OP OFF command 

(reference Part 3, Section 7). 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

---------·---------

Note: Even though the brake coil is not energized during 

the delayed turn-off period, the brake is not fully 

engaged due to the time constant of the coil until 

approximately 70 milliseconds into the delay period. 

c. a take-up cycle is being perfonned in the backup mode and 

the Tension Looper Approaching Full signal is not present. 

2.5.2.3 FHE Tension Ann Error Feedback Signal Processing and Dynamic Braking 

Control. In the primary mode of operation, the FHE continually processes 

the analog Tension Arm Error feedback signal and drives the supply based on the 

result obtained. Whenever neither forward nor rearward drive power is being 

applied, both transistor shunt switches are closed, dynamically braking the 

motor. Similarly, the take-up spool will also be dynamically braked whenever it is not being driven. 

Predictable characteristics for the take-up drive have been obtained by using 

regulated power for the drive circuit. Two voltage regulators in the FHE 

provide power to the take-up motor and also to the supply brake. The primary 

mode regulator is turned ON whenever a 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE command is received, 

or the Tension Ann Full or Tension Ann Empty signal is present, providing 

18.7 volts to the brake and take-up circuits. The backup mode regulator is 

turned ON by a Looper Supply Side Empty signal and turned OFF by a Looper 

Supply Side Full signal. When ON, the regulator produces a 20.4-volt output which, due to drops in the FHE circuitry, is reduced to near 18.7 volts 

at the take-up spool motor. 

2.5.2.3.1 FHE Film Tension Ann Error Signal Processing. The 5 Tension Ann 

Error signal processing is similar to that used by the FCE for 9 Tension Arm 

Error signal, and will not be discussed in detail here. The initial portion 

of the circuitry is virtually identical to the FCE; the Tension Arm Error 

signal is used to generate a relative Tension Ann Displacement signal and an 

Ann Velocity (rate) signal which are summed to produce a single error value 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

for the forward and rearward drive comparators. Here the similarity ends. 

Rather than employing a sawtooth-wave train as the comparator reference, the 

error signal is compared to different de voltages at the forward and rearward 

comparators. If the voltage output from the summer amplifier lies between 

the reference voltages, no drive is applied to the supply motor. If the 

summer amplifier voltage falls outside the rearward or forward limit, the 

supply is driven in that direction to bring the error back within the 

reference limits. 

2.5.2.4 FHE Instrumentation Output. The instrumentation signals representing take-up motor current, supply motor current, and supply brake current 

(IMPs 5075, 5077, and 5124 respectively) are produced in the FHE using resistors to monitor current in the power return lines. The signals generated 

are amplified to levels compatible with DTU input requirements, and transmitted 

to the DTU through the instrumentation processor. 

Also located in the FHE are the processing circuits for the film tension, 

film quantity, and looper position instrumentation points. The output 

signals, as generated, require no further processing and are sent directly 

to the instrumentation processor for output to the DTU. 

2.5.2.5 5 Parking Brake. The 5 parking brake circuitry, although not contained in the FHE, is shown in the logic diagram (Figure 3.2-41) due to its 

presence in the 5 film handling subsystem. Essentially, the parking brake 

supplies a small reverse current to the supply motor to assist the mechanical 

brake in preventing spool rotation during launch. The parking brake is 

inhibited by commanding 5 OP ON, and, if the parking-brake power is ON when 

5 operational power is removed, the brake circuitry will not be re-enabled 

until 5 PARKING BRAKE OFF is commanded. Otherwise, the function is 

enabled whenever 5 OP is OFF, and the parking brake power can be turned ON 

at anytime. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control Sys tern Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008-_W-C-019840~RI-80 

2.5.3 9 and 5 Frequency Phase Lock Loop Electronics 

Operation of the 9 and 5 platen drives is controlled by the 9 and 5 FPLLE 

units, respectively. As the block diagram of Figure 3.2-42 shows, each 

FPLLE consists of two redundant sides (A and B) with each side receiving a 

separate feedback signal and controlling a separate motor coil. Internally 

the 9 and 5 units are identical except for a gain control resistor which 

reduces the gain in the 5 subsystem to compensate for the lower platen 

inertia. 

Redundancy is preserved throughout the entire subsystem. The power monitor 

and control unit supplies operational power to each FPLLE on four pairs of 

wires via the same switches that provide FCE and FHE power. The lines are 

fused individually on each side in the FPLLE module. Separate power 

switches are provided for the two channels, A and B, of the command 

processor output, with the output of the two 9 OP and 5 OP switches paralleled inside the PM and C (refer to the PM and C logic diagram in Part 3, 

Section 7). 

The command processor supplies separate ON/OFF commands directly to each 

side of the FPLLE for both the 9 and 5 units. Since the CP also controls 

the PM and C power switches, a redundant method of shutdown is obtained 

which prevents a catastrophic failure in one FPLLE from affecting operation 

of the other. The CP also supplies a separate (electrically isolated) tenbit drive speed command (14V WORD) to each side of each FPLLE. However, 

processing of the film-drive speed command in the CP is performed in such 

a manner that the two subsystems cannot operate simultaneously at differing 

speeds, although either side of one FPLLE can be operated simultaneously 

with either side of the other FPLLE. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD V'I 

. I\) N 0 I ...... I-' -J 0 --

0 .j:>. 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

1i1D lll115l'llU::f G 

POWER 

MONITOR 

AND 

CONTROL 

' 

,- t--1 ---' 

COMMAND 

PROCESSOR 

I 

-- f -·· 

i 

~-\ 

'SOP t_: ___ , -·f 

INST. 

PWR. 

Handle vi a BYEMAN 

9 FPLLE 

9 MTR 

SIDE A 

A 

B 

SIDE B 

TO I. P. 

~-

-- ION TO LP. 

. S FPLLE 

SIDE A S MTR 

SIDE B . -'. '"l 

Mechanical l - ·- - - - ----- - - _J 

3.2-42. FPLLE Block 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

9 ENCODER PROCESSOR ~- -----·--

! 9A 9 ENCODER 

__ J 

A ¥""_.., 

i 

l B 

r--- i ~ L _____ - -- I 9B 

I 

-hll""" 

I 

S ENCODER PROCESSOR 

_____ J 

S ENCODER i 

···-·---i I , I 

+----~ 

SA 

--~; 

SB 

i - -- --- --{~ 

Connection I 

G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

The 9/5 RUNOUT conunand combines the functions of the 9/5 OP ON conunands and the 

9/5 film drive ON conunand, selecting the normal speed range for the FPLLE (see 

2.5.3.2 belowJ and setting the two most significant bits of the film-drive speed 

to 11 111 • The remaining eight bits are unchanged from the last executed state. 

2.5.3.l FPLLE Mechanical Description. The Frequency Phase Lock Loop Electronics 

(either 9 or 5) consists of an aluminum base plate with two identical stacks of 

six boards. The base plate assembly contains the high power transistors used 

for the motor drive, logic power regulators, and power switches. The four boards 

mounted on the base plate are aluminum, and contain the medium power circuitry. 

The remaining boards are printed circuits-which contain the low-level digital 

and analog components. The two stacks represent sides A and B of the FPLLE, 

and are interconnected only at the power sources, and at the current and loop 

error instrumentation summing circuitry described in Subsection 2.5.3.4. A 

plastic dust cover protects both stacks. 

The two FPLLE units (both of which are mounted on the -Y side of the film supply 

enclosure) are each approximately 10" x 12" x 611 and weigh about 16 pounds. 

Electrical connectors Jl through J4 carry the power and control signals between 

the FPLLE and the PPS/DP EAC. A fifth connector (JS) carries only test signals 

and is not used on-orbit. 

2.5.3.2 FPLLE Operation. The film-drive system operates in four speed ranges: 

Normal: 3.37 - 11.8 inches/second ,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 

Normal 

Normal + 4 (EAC) 

(Normal + 4) x 2 

inches/second 

0.84 - 2.95 inches/second 

1.68 - 5.9 inches/second 

The EAC range provides the speeds for high-orbit photography. 

Each range is divided into 1023 linear steps (1024 discrete speeds) represented 

by the ten-bit film-drive speed command. The following equations represent the 

)P3.~~~ TO/ ..£... 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

25X1 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

film-drive speed in inches per second as a function of conunanded film-drive 

speed step N(O < N < 1023): 

(1) 

(2) 

FDS normal 

(3) FDSEAC 

( 4) FDSEAC x 2 

= 

3.37 + N(ll.8 - 3.37) 

1023 

0.84 + N(2.95 - 0.84) 

1023 

1.68 + N(5.9 - 1.68) 

1023 

At the time of film drive "ON" conunand execution, power is applied to the control 

electronics (assuming operation power is "ON" in the conunanded subsystem) and 

a nominal 150-millisecond delay follows for internal logic synchronization. 

Power is then applied to the platen drive motor and the starting circuit 

accelerates the motor until a frequency match is obtained between the FPLLE 

reference and the optical encoder feedback signal (system is in lock). This occurs 

within 150 milliseconds as the design goal for speeds greater than 11.8 inches per 

second. Once in lock, the phase loop detector is enabled, and the high-resolution 

portion of a photographic cycle begins. 

The detector attempts to maintain a constant phase difference between the 

reference signal and the encoder output; i.e., a constant platen velocity, by 

varying FPLLE motor current as a function of the phase difference. 

At the film drive "OFF" conunand, the FPLLE provides two stages of braking current 

to the motor, switching to the low braking torque when the platen rate falls 

below 2 ips (0.5 ips for EAC and EAC x 2), and then coasting when the speed falls 

below 0.5 ips (0.1 ips for EAC and EAC x 2) until power is off. Power is removed 

150 milliseconds after conunand receipt. Part 2, Section 10 provides a detailed 

G 

-

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e v I a By rn AN 

Cont ro I Sys tern On I y 

25X1 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

description of the film start-up and stop transients during a photographic cycle. 

These transients must be taken into account when determining individual frame 

lengths from the total camera ON time and the commanded film-drive speed. 

2.5.3.3 FPLLE Electrical Design. The following describes a single frequency 

phase lock loop electronics module. Since the 9 and 5 modules are essentially 

alike, the information will apply equally to either. 

The FPLLE consists of two identical halves isolated from each other except for 

the common power and command input connectors and the instrumentation circuitry. 

Upon command, each side delivers power to its associated motor, encoder, and 

channel of the encoder processor. The two channels (one for each encoder side) 

contained in each encoder signal processor are electrically isolated. The output 

of each encoder side is amplified and squared in the processor and fed back to 

the FPLLE to complete the servo loop as shown in Figure 3.2-42. In the EAC speed 

range, the output of the encoder is frequency multiplied by four by the processor 

electronics. 

The block diagram of Figure 3.2-43 represents one channel of a FPLLE unit. The 

associated motor, encoder, and encoder processor are included to close the 

feedback loop. Each block is described more fully in the following sections to 

illustrate the operation of the phase lock loop circuitry. 

2.5.3.3.l ON/OFF Control Circuit. The ON/OFF control circuit monitors ON/OFF 

command status, and, through use of separate logic and series switches, 

controls the 24.5-volt main power input (operational power) and the logic and 

operational amplifier supplies (+5 volts and +6/+12 volts respectively). The 

switches are separate so that a single-failure mode cannot prevent selection 

of the alternate FPLLE system. In addition, logic level signals are provided 

to the start and brake circuits to control their operations. 

2.5.3.3.2 Power Supplies. This block represents the integrated circuit 

regulators that provide power to the logic and the operational amplifiers, and 

switched 24.5-volt power to the power amplifier. 

G 

- Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handl1: via BYEMAN 

(l:Jntrol System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

co 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

VI 

. 

N 

I 

....... 

0 

00 

TOP SECRET" G 

10 Bit 

Speed 

Command 

Command 

Ref 

Sig~ 

lrogr~mable1 

I Counter 

- ~Motor 

· Drive 

1

1· Loop 

Phase 

I Filter:<! 

I 

Divider 1-C • 

Up J ~ 

Gate 

Dn · 

~ 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Summing Dn Phase 

-: Up , -~ '. 

Ref -- ~·--- _ Ref Gen ---

Ampl -- · - Detector -----

Crystal 

Oscillator 

& Divider ____ ,_ 

.. 

r 

i+24.SV ... -- _J __ '.+l2V ... 

VCM · +6V .. 

+5V"41 

Power 

Supplies 

-------------

r· ------ +24,SV 

r : l-0~/0ff-- -r On/Off 

C?ntr?l --- Command 

Circuit 

-:-T--r-- To Current 

. _ ____ _ i I L_. Instrument. ~ 

• _ ., ____ , Circuit a 

lll-i--belay& ! [~rake I ~ ----·-1-----1 Start I Circuit : - • "t I 0 · Circui , -----1--·- - ' """' -<-- i ;:a 

1 - -- '=--~--- -----r ---=---~-I ,- •: ~ Summrng ~ Filter Amp No. 2 . l\J 

~ . i ---- Summing . ~ 

Amp No. 1 I ~ 

--1- - JL L:p Error i - ! .---------------Se~:] Relay • ~7~~~~~entation l ~ j I - ---;::er 

,--i Detector 

Normal/EAC 

Command -~-+-~~~~~----------"" 

E~code~ -S~gnal ~- Processor 1-

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

l System 

I'-) 

01 

>< 

-->. 

Encoder - Motor :~ Amplifier 1 

Figure 3.2-43. FPLLE Block Diagram (Single Channel) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

----------

2.5.3.3.3 Crystal Oscillator and Divider. The crystal oscillator provides 

the basic clock frequency for the system. The frequency divider allows 

oscillator operation at a reasonable frequency (~110 KHz) while providing a 

low frequency (~430 Hz) signal to the reference generator phase detector. 

2.5.3.3.4 Reference Generator Phase Detector. The phase detector, summing 

amplifier, filter, voltage controlled multivibrator (VCM) and programmable 

counter form a frequency phase lock loop frequency synthesizer. The phase 

detector compares frequency and phase of the programmable counter output 

(reference 2.5.3.3.8) with the divided crystal output. The resulting outputs are pulses of fixed amplitude at the divided crystal oscillator 

frequency. Pulse widths appearing on either the up or down detector output 

lines represent deviation from perfect frequency/phase match. 

2.5.3.3.5 Reference Swmning Amplifier. The reference summing amplifier 

accepts the separate up/down phase detector outputs and combines them into 

a single de signal with positive and negative pulses representing reference 

generator loop error. 

2.5.3.3.6 Filter. The filter consists of two sections; the first for loop 

compensation and the second to eliminate high frequency noise. The output 

is an error signal between 9 and 12 volts which controls the multivibrator 

frequency. 

2.5.3.3.7 Voltage Controlled Multivibrator. The multivibrator delivers a 

square wave output at a frequency demanded by the filtered error signal. 

The range is 3.5:1 with a maximum output frequency of ~618 KHz. 

2.5.3.3.8 Programmable Counter. The programmable counter output delivered to 

the reference generator phase detector is the VCM output frequency divided by 

a variable (409 to 1432) representing the commanded drive speed. Frequency/ 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System On I y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

phase comparison with the divided crystal oscillator frequency results in 

an error signal that, when summed and filtered, forces the VCM to run at a 

multiple of the divided oscillator frequency. This system results in a 

linear variation in reference signal frequency with command while maintaining the stable characteristics of a crystal oscillator. 

2.5.3.3.9 Divider. The divider is a ripple counter which reduces the VCM 

output frequency by 64 to obtain the proper 

range for comparison with the encoder signal. 

2.5.3.3.10 Phase Detector. The motor-drive loop phase detector is similar 

to that in the reference generator loop. It compares the frequency/phase 

of the encoder feedback signal, with the reference generator signal, which 

represents commanded speed. Pulses representing deviation from perfect 

phase match are obtained at the up and down outputs. 

2.5.3.3.11 Gate. Logic gates are included in both the up and down detector output lines to inhibit the detector output during system startup. 

This prevents the filter from assuming an incorrect charge and delaying 

system lock. 

2.5.3.3.12 Summing Amplifier Number 1. The motor-drive loop Number 1 suming amplifier is similar to that used in the reference generator. The 

output is the combined gated-phase detector outputs which consist of positive and negative pulses representing motor-loop directional errors. The 

summing amplifier output pulse width represents the magnitude of deviation 

from perfect lock. 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14~ C05097221 

Hand] e v1 a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 

25X1 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G_ 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.5.3.3.13 Filter. The motor-drive loop filter consists of two sections as 

follows: 

(1) A two-pole low-pass filter that detects the average 

voltage from summing amplifier Number 1. 

(2) A phase lag network that introduces 12 db of highfrequency attentuation for loop stability when in 

the EAC speed range. In the normal speed range 

this section defaults to a unity gain buffer amplifier 

as a result of a relay contact opening. 

The output of the motor-drive loop filter is an error signal between 2 and 10 

volts with 6 volts representing zero loop error. 

2.5.3.3.14 Delay and Start Circuit. The delay and start circuit contains logic 

to prevent motor operation for 150 msec while the power supplies and reference 

generator stabilize after an ON command. Following the initial delay, the start 

circuit delivers a signal representing a fixed motor acceleration rate to motordrive loop summing amplifier Number 2. When a frequency match signal is obtained 

from the phase detector, the forced start signal is removed and the detector 

gates are enabled. 

2.5.3.3.15 Brake Circuit. The brake circuit contains logic which, when triggered 

by the control circuit, monitors system speed. The brake circuit logic delivers 

a signal to the Number 2 summing amplifier that forces deceleration in each of 

two fixed rates dependent on actual system speed by switching to the low braking 

torque at approximately 2 ips (0.5 ips for EAC) and coasting below 0.5 ips 

(0.1 ips for EAC). Power is removed after 150 msec. 

2.5.3.3.16 Summing Amplifier Number 2. Summing amplifier Number 2 receives the 

start, stop, and loop error signals, and delivers a composite error signal to 

the power amplifier to operate the motor. The output is 6 volts at perfect 

system lock with excursions to 2 and 10 vol ts representing a demand for full 

torque in the slower and faster directions respectively. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e v1 a BY EMAN 

Control Sy5tem On I y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.5.3.3.17 Power Amplifier. The power amplifier is a bridge-type amplifier 

operated in the current mode. The output characteristic is 0.36 ampere per input 

volt. The amplifier contains current-limiting circuitry to allow selection of 

the alternate system in the event of an excessive current overload. 

2.5.3.3.18 Motor, Encoder, and Encoder Processor. The three remaining blocks, 

the motor, encoder, and encoder processor, are not components of the FPLLE module. 

Each has been described earlier as a part of the 9 x 5 dual platen camera. A 

brief summary is included here to complete the FPLLE explanation: 

(1) Motor - The motor is a brush-type torque motor having 

12.8 ohms resistance and peak torque of 1.2 ft-lbs at 

21.2 volts. The motor is installed directly on the drum 

shaft. 

(2) Encoder - The encoder is an optical type that delivers 

9,000 pulses per revolution on two separate output 

lines that are shifted in phase by 90°. 

(3) Encoder Signal Processor - In the normal speed range the 

signal processor amplifies and squares one of the encoder 

quadrature outputs and delivers it through a line driver 

to the phase detector for comparison to the reference 

generator output. In the EAC range, the encoder processor 

frequency multiplies the encoder output frequency by four 

by firing one shot at each edge of the sine and cosine 

encoder outputs and performing an "OR" operation on the 

pulses. The signal is sent to the phase detector through 

the same line driver. The processor multiplies the 

encoder frequency by four when a relay contact located 

inside the FPLLE electronics module is closed. 

2.5.3.4 Instrumentation. Two instrumentation points are available from the FPLLE 

to aid in determining the health of the unit. These two, the current and loop 

instrumentation points, combine the measurements from each side of the FPLLE, 

sending a single output to the instrumentation processor for each function. 

2.5.3.4.1 FPLLE Current Instrumentation Monitor. The current drawn by sides A 

and B is continually sensed by a dropping resistor in the return line for each 

side. The signals are amplified, summed, and delivered to the instrumentation 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e v1 a BY EMAN 

Control SystPm Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

processor as a voltage representing total FPLLE current (IMP 5092 for the 9 FPLLE 

and IMP 5098 for the 5 FPLLE). Since both sides cannot be operated simultaneously 

(lockout circuitry is in the CP), the instrumentation signal represents the ONside current drain. Output is on a 600 ma/volt scale with a bandwidth of 100 hertz. 

2.5.3.4.2 FPLLE Loop Error Instrumentation Monitor. The loop-error monitor 

represents phase error, or the relationship between the reference signal and 

encoder signal supplied to the motor-drive loop phase detector (Figure 3.2-43). 

The inputs are obtained from the loop filters (side A and side B), summed, and 

delivered to the instrumentation processor as a voltage representing encoder lag 

(IMP 5097 for the 9 FPLLE and IMP 5156 for the 5 FPLLE). The instrumentation 

function has a slope of 16 mv/degree, and a bandwidth of 100 hertz. 

2.5.4 9 and 5 Camera Electronics Assemblies 

The camera electronics assemblies (CEA), more commonly known as the 9 and 5 drum 

recorder electronics assemblies (OREA), comprise the electronic control for all 

the previously described camera hardware, excluding the actual film drive. The 

9 and 5 CEA units are functionally identical in every aspect. Therefore, the 

following sections describing the CEA functions will apply equally to either 

subsystem. 

2.5.4.1 Camera Electronics Assembly Mechanical Description. Each CEA unit (both 

of which are mounted on the +Y side of the film supply enclosure in the SEM) 

measures approximately 10" x 12" x 16" and weighs about 20 pounds. Each unit 

consists of an aluminum base plate with two stacks of circuit boards (11 boards 

total) protected by a plastic dust cover. The base plate assembly contains the 

high-power transistors used for the slant range compensation and variable 

exposure mechanism motor drives and for the SRC power switch. Five of the boards 

are aluminum and contain medium power circuitry. The four aluminum boards with 

the most power to dissipate are mounted directly to the 

six boards are printed circuits which contain low-power 

components. Each board, except A-11 which is half-size, 

with the main structural element being the base plate. 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

base plate. The other 

digital and analog 

is secured in eight places 

Hand I e v 1 a BY EM AN 

Control System On\ y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

The CEA electrical interface consists of six connectors mounted together on 

an aluminum plate. Connectors JI through JS carry the power and control 

signals between the CEA and other components of the PPS/DP EAC. Connector J6 

is not used during flight since it contains test points only useful during 

ground testing. 

2.5.4.2 Camera Electronics Assembly Operation. As the block diagram in 

Figure 3.2-44 shows, the CEA controls the focus adjust subsystem (slant 

range compensation and nominal platen adjustment), the variable exposure 

mechanism, and the data tracks and interframe marks. 

2.5.4.2.1 Slant Range Compensation. Slant range compensation (SRC) is 

controlled by a closed-loop servo system that provides automatic platen 

position adjustment as a function of the four most significant film-drive 

speed command bits. The SRC has 16 equally spaced discrete positions over 

a 4.5-mil range enabling the system to compensate for film-drive speeds 

in the normal range of 3.37 ips to 11.8 ips. Step 10 is at factory best 

focus (or at best focus as adjusted by the NPA subsystem) and Step 1 

nominally +0.0027 inch from there (positive reference: toward the Ross 

Corrector). 

Use of the FPLLE extended drive-speed range cannot be correctly compensated for by the SRC system. If the SRC is not disabled by command, it 

will continue to operate based on the four most significant FDS bits. 

This operation will not result in proper positioning of the platen. In 

the mode, the platen must be positioned through the use 

of the nominal platen adjust system. 

The SRC subsystem will change the platen position at a rate of 4 steps 

(0.3 mil/step) in 0.20 second. The SRC circuitry is turned ON and OFF 

in conjunction with the associated film drive ON/OFF command (14V WORD), 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Cont ro I Sys tern On I y 

25X1 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

ti-1 

. 

N 

I 

t--' 

t--' 

tr1 

SRC 

Handle via BYEMAN 

<:ontrol System Only 

G 

1~~~-1 --~ P M & C 

j : ·-~~-..-~· 

Prime 

r 

NPA 

PRIME/BACKUP 

. I I~ , 

I 

I 

I 

I 

ELECTRONICS 

ASSEMBLY 

VEM 

r 

FOCUS ADJUSTMENT 

Figure 3.2-44. CEA Subsystem Block Diagram 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

DATA 

TRACKS 

I/F 

MARKS 

TOJ> SliCAET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

I 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008-_W-C-019840-RI-80 

and will function whether or not operational power is ON in that subsystem. 

The SRC can be disabled by command (9 SRC DISABLE and 5 SRC DISABLE), and 

will not function with the film drive until the disable has been removed 

by commanding OP ON in the affected subsystem. 

The SRC subsystem, shown in Figure 3.2-45, is a closed-loop servo using an 

ac motor as the drive and an optical encoder as the sensing device. The 

system has no redundancy within itself but its function can be assumed by 

the NPA drive, should it become necessary. Since much of the circuitry is 

similar to the other functions in the CEA, a block-by-block description is 

provided here. 

(1) 24.5-Volt Power Switch - The SRC system has its own power 

switch which greatly ·reduces the power consumption of the 

system. With receipt of a film drive ON command, 24.5-volt 

power is applied to the SRC +5-volt regulator, the SRC ac 

motor common, the SRC brake common, the SRC encoder current 

source, and the data signal +12-volt power regulator. A 

film drive OFF command removes power. 

The unswitched primary power from the PM and C is fused by 

two 5-ampere fuses in parallel to guard against short circuits. The power switch is provided with rise and fall 

time control for EMI control. 

(2) +5-Volt Regulator - The +5-volt regulator consists of a preregulator (zener diode with an emitter follower), an integrated 

circuit regulator, and an external pass transistor. The 

regulator is current-limited for protection against short 

circuits. 

3.2-116 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand! e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System On! y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) VI CJ) 

CD N .. I I\) ~ 

...... 

0 ~ 

'1 -J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP s~cReT G 

Film Drive OFF 

(13V WORD or 14V ~DRD) 

Command Bi ts: 

FDS Bits 1-4 

Power Switch 

+5-Volt 

Regulator 

To Logic and I/F Mark 

One-Shot Timer 

A 

Comparator 

B 

Position Bits 

NOTE: SRC disable 

Reference 

Section 9. 

* Centering bits 1 and 2 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

Crystal 

is 

A>B 

A<B Flip Flop 

Divider 

(-7- 128) 

Mark 

863.3 

4-Phase 

Generator 

3.2-45. SRC Block Diagram 

BlF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

AC Motor 

Power 

Switches 

(4) 

"' ' 

Brake 

Power 

Switches 

(2) 

Mechanical Link 

TOP 51!CIUiT 

Current 

Source 

G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

(3) Four-Bit Magnitude Comparator - The comparator accepts the fourbit command and four-bit encoder position data signals and provides separate outputs to the storage register that controls the 

drive direction. 

(4) Storage Register - The flip-flop storage register accepts the 

comparison information from the four-bit comparator and holds 

it between each SRC station. The comparison information is only 

allowed to be read into the flip-flop when the encoder is within the centering bit (CBl or CB2) area of each SRC station. The 

output of the flip-flop is logically combined to remove the SRC 

brake whenever movement is required. The flip-flop consists 

of two cross-coupled NAND gates with appropriate gating for the 

centering bit enable/inhibit functions. 

(5) Oscillator - The oscillator unit consists of a crystal oscillator and internal divider producing a frequency of 110.505 KHz. 

The oscillator is the same as that employed in the FPLLE unit. 

(6) Divider - Two binary counters divide the oscillator output down to 

863.3 Hz which is provided to the four-phase generator as the 

clock signal. 

(7) Four-Phase Generator - The four-phase generator accepts the 

clock pulses and direction information and generates the correct 

switching sequence to drive the motor phases. Each of the outputs controls one of the four motor-power switches, turning on 

one phase at a time in the correct order of rotation. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

(8) Motor Power Switches - Each phase of the ac motor is driven by 

a separate PNP-NPN transistor pair with controlled rise and 

fall times. Each PNP stage is driven by a gate on the fourphase generator. 

(9) Brake and Power Switches - The brake has redundant coils and 

is engaged (mechanically) when no power is applied. The brake 

develops 2 oz -in. minimum torque and is used for stopping the 

SRC system at the end of a cycle and to hold the SRC whenever 

the NPA system is being powered. Separate power switches are 

provided for each coil, which are energized (brake released) 

whenever the SRC drive is operating. 

(10) Encoder - The encoder is a non-contact optical device incorporating LEDs and phototransistors. The glass code disk contains six tracks of infqrmation; the four-bit position word 

(bits 1-4) and two centering bits (CBl and CB2). There is 

one LED and phototransistor for each track of information. 

The LEDs are electrically in series and driven by a current 

source. Zener diodes are placed in parallel with each LED to 

preclude complete system failure in the event of a single 

LED failure. 

When the four-bit position feedback word is equal to the fourbi t position command word and the centering bits indicate the 

center of the station, the stop sequence is initiated. The 

four-phase generator stops cycling and current to the brake 

release coils is turned OFF, engaging the brake. At the same 

time, a one-shot timer causes phase four (4) of the motor to 

be powered for approximately 60 msec. This combination of 

mechanical and dynamic braking assures that the platen will 

stop in the center of the station. 

_G_ 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008-_ W-C~Ol9~4-_9-RI-80 

(11) Encoder Current Source - The encoder LED current source consists 

of a simple zener diode and NPN transistor stage which delivers 

approximately 25 ma. 

(12) AC Motor - The ac motor is a two-phase, four-pole permanent 

magnet hysteresis, synchronous type which turns at 6500 rpm. 

The motor is fitted with a 27:1 gearhead on the front and a 

brake on the rear. The geared-down motion is applied through 

the focus adjust mechanism gearbox to both the pivot frame 

eccentric drive and the optical encoder shaft. 

2.5.4.2.2 Nominal Platen Adjustment. The nominal platen adjustment (NPA) 

subsystem can be used to move the platen over a range of 24 mils (±12 mils 

from factory best focus) in 0.1-mil increments to compensate for the 

following: 

(1) Physical changes in the PPS/DP EAC resulting in a shift of 

the focus position from the factory setting. 

(2) Differing thicknesses of the various film types used in the 

PPS/DP EAC. 

(3) Inability of the SRC subsystem to correctly compensate for 

the image distance~!~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 

(4) Failure of the SRC subsystem (the NPA can be used as a backup 

on a frame-by-frame basis). 

3.2-120 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 

25X1 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

In operation, the NPA mechanism shifts the entire SRC range, changing the relationship of SRC step number versus platen position by driving the platen 

to a new position without moving the SRC encoder. Should the nominal focus 

point change from the factory setting (or if a different film thickness is 

encountered), a one-time adjustment by the NPA mechanism will bias each of 

the 16 SRC steps to accommodate the new requirements. 

The nominal platen adjust electronics consists of a primary and backup circuit, both connected to the phases of a single motor, and each operating a 

separate coil of a single brake which is an integral part of the motor. 

Both primary and backup systems are open-loop servos which require analysis 

of instrumentation to verify platen position. Selection of the primary 

or backup mode is controlled by command in the command processor, steering 

the FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE and FOCUS DRIVE INHIBIT commands to either the primary 

or backup power switch in the CEA. 

Primary mode platen motion is started by receipt of either a normal stored 

program command (NSPC) or real time command (RTC) indicating the direction 

of travel, PLATEN PLUS (toward the RCFLA) or PLATEN MINUS (away from the RCFLA) 

(refer to Part 3, Section 9 for an explanation of command types ), Motion 

initiated by a normal command will continue at the rate of 0.5 mil/second 

until a PLATEN STOP command is received. Use of a real time command to 

move the platen turns on the platen drive and also triggers a timer in the 

CP which latches the direction relay for 100 milliseconds beyond the end 

of the last RTC received, resulting in a movement of 0.1 mil for each RTC. 

Motion will be stopped either by receipt of a PLATEN STOP command, or by 

the timer reaching its trip point and resetting the direction relay. 

Backup mode operation can only be controlled by real time PLATEN PLUS or 

PLATEN MINUS commands. Once started, motion will continue at the rate of 

0.1 mil in 0.8 second only so long as commands continue to be received by 

3.2-121 

_G_ 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand! e vi a BY EM AN 

CDntrol System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

the CP. The drive will be stopped 100 milliseconds after the end of the last 

command, or upon receipt of a PLATEN STOP command, whichever occurs first. 

2.5.4.2.2.1 NPA Operation. The following descriptions refer to Figures 

3.2-46 and 3.2-47. 

(1) Primary NPA Operation - In the primary mode, when an enable 

command is received, a one-shot timer fires which releases 

the brake, resets the logic and powers phases three (3) and 

four (4) of the motor for approximately 28 msec. This causes 

the NPA logic and motor to reset to its proper starting 

position (i.e., the nearest 0.1-mil increment of platen 

motion). The brake is then engaged and power removed from 

phases three (3) and four (4) until a direction command is received. 

The direction command controls the sequence in which the four 

phases are generated. The four-phase generator consists of a 

four-state ring counter with two of the states representing 

one phase and the other two states representing a second 

phase. The remaining two phases are the inverse of the first 

two. The ring counter is cycled by a clock signal derived 

from timing signals Cl and C2 (two 20-Hz square waves logically summed (Cl+ C2)). The clock signal is enabled only when 

a direction command is present. 

For a PLATEN PLUS command, the phases are generated in the 

sequence 3 and 4, 3 and 2, 2 and 1, l and 4, causing a counterclockwise rotation of the NPA motor as viewed from the shaft 

end. A PLATEN MINUS command causes phases to be powered in the 

3.2-122 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control System On I y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

V-l 

N 

' ...... 

N 

V-l 

TOP SECRET G 

Each S Amps 

(Unswitched) 

24,S vdc 

~ 

~ J 

D . I . h I Focus rive - .. --------->, Power Sw1tc 

Enable/Inhibit I 

(Primary Mode *) 

+5-Volt 

Regulator 

To Logic and Buffers 

Ti.ming Signal Cl 

Timing Signal C2 --· __ _ 

PLATEN PLUS 

PLATEN MINUS 

Timing 

Signal 

Buffers 

-----

* Mode selection, primary 

or backup, is performed 

in the command processor. 

Reference Part 3, Section 9 

**Bit 2 of IMP 5063 (9 CEA), or, 

IMP 5066 (5 CEA) 

***Bit 4 of IMP 5063 (9 CEA), or, 

IMP 5066 (5 CEA) 

Handle via BYEMAN 

C.ontrol System Only 

Primary NPA 

Enabl~/Inhibit Monitor*** 

Switched 24.5 vdc Power 

Data 

Signal l>13·- . c ** 

~--~~ I "'"'''~ 

"'"'" ~ I ~±' [ [ 

Control I Clock ]11111 Generator 

'-ohm l~ <P q,4 Logic 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

To Backup 

NPA Electronics 

~ Motor Power 

Power 

Switches 

(4) 

Power 

Switches 

Enable 

~-----1-1------Power Switches 

....... .....__ I 

I 

I 

I 

_L 

Power 

Switch 

Brake Power 

Dual 

Coil 

Brake 

Power Switch 

Brake Enable/Inhibit 

Figure 3.2-46. Primary NPA Block Diagram 

I 0 P Sf CRET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TAD ccrDcT G 

tN 

N 

I 

I-' 

N 

.+:> 

Each s Amp 

24,S vdc ~l (Unswi tched) -~r 

Focus Drive 

Enable/Inhibit 

(Backup Mode *) 

-~~~~----.] Switch 

5-Volt ~-] gulator 

·-·----

Platen Plus 

Platen Minus 

Real Time 

Command Pulses 

To Logic 

r 

* Mode selection, primary or 

backup, is performed in the 

command processor. Reference 

Part 3, Section 9 

>.-- Enabl 

To Bit 3 of IMP 5063 (9 CEA), 

or IMP 5066 (5 CEA) 

Handle via BYE.MAN 

ContrQ.l System Only 

24.S vdc Switched Power 

B/U NPA Enable/Inhibit 

Monitor** 

_[ ase 

Generator 

q,l 

- --- _.$ .._2 -

=i

l 2-Ph 

' --- - q,3 --- - -

¢4 

---~---· Brake Enable/Inhibit 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Step~e~r 

~-o· "'tor { , "-.... "---

'--- '-

I •I Power 

Switches 

(4) 

Power L__.,..j Switches l Enable 

Power 

Switch 

To Primary 

NPA Electronics 

Motor Power 

_____ Power Switches 

,----- Brake Power 

Dual Coil 

Brake 

Power Switch 

Figure 3. 2-4 7. Backup NPA Block Diagram 

G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BI F-008- W-C-019840-RI- 8 O 

sequence 3 and 4, 4 and 1, 1 and 2, 2 and 3 driving the motor 

clockwise. The motor is a two-pole permanent magnet stepper 

motor, and rotates once in 200 milliseconds, moving the platen 

0 .1 mil. 

The tolerances on the length of the direction command and the 

coincidence between timing signal C and the direction command 

make it possible that the electronics will not receive an integral multiple of four timing signal C pulses during the 

command period. Since the number could be off by one pulse 

(plus or minus), the motor would be off by~ revolution, causing 

a 0.025-mil error in platen position For this reason, when the 

direction command is removed, a one-shot timer is triggered 

which keeps the mechanical brake released, resets the logic and 

powers motor phases 3 and 4 for approximately 28 msec., resetting 

the motor to the same angular position at the end of every 

direction command. 

(2) Backup NPA Operation - The backup mode of operation is like the 

primary mode with two exceptions. First, the backup NPA uses a 

buffered 100-msec duration real time command (RTC) pulse from the 

command processor as the clock signal for the four-phase generator. 

In the command processor the same real time command pulse triggers 

a timer which latches the appropriate direction relay for 100 msec 

beyond the end of the last RTC pulse. This causes the NPA motor 

to rotate ~ revolution for each RTC command received. Thus, 

four RTC commands are required to move the NPA one step (0.1 mil). 

Second, the backup NPA does not reset to the same angular position 

each time the circuit is enabled. Nor does it reset at the end of 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BYEtv!AN 

Control System On I y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008-_ W-C-019840-RI-80 

a direction command. However, when a direction command is received, the starting position of the four-phase generator will 

always be the same, causing the motor to return, if necessary, 

to the same starting position as in the primary mode. To 

avoid the possibility of driving the platen to an unwanted 

position, backup commands are normally given in groups of four. 

2.5.4.2.3 Variable Exposure Mechanism Control. The variable exposure 

mechanism (VEM), either 9 or 5 described in Section 2.2.2.2, is controlled 

by a closed-loop servo system with an optical encoder providing the positional feedback signal. The VEM, or slit mechanism, provides 16 discrete 

exposure levels to compensate for various film characteristics, drive speeds, 

and scene input. The slit widths vary from 0.0040 inch to 0.3000 inch with 

a ratio between consecutive steps of 1.334; i.e., 0.125 log E (exposure). A 

maximum time of one second is required to attain the next wider or narrower 

slit. As explained in Subsection 2.2.2.2.1, the variable exposure mechanism 

will exhibit a hysteresis effect for steps 9-15 due to action of the cam and 

encoder. The positive stops in the cam prevent total closure of the slit 

and also stop the mechanism before it can exceed the recoverable drive limits. 

Electronically, the variable exposure subsystem consists of redundant control 

circuits selectable by command (SLIT A SELECT and SLIT B SELECT). Mechanically, 

the system has a single drive motor, and a dual track encoder. Executing the 

film drive ON command in either subsystem will inhibit the slit electronics 

drive in both, even with the operational power OFF. The drive will not restart 

with the film drive OFF command regardless of the actual slit position versus 

the commanded position. Motion can be restarted while the film is running, by 

again commanding the desired slit position. 

3.2-126 

_G_ 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System On\ y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008-. W-_g_:-019840_-:::RI-80 

2.5.4.2.3.1 VEM Operation. The VEM runs on unswitched power (24.5 volts 

nominal) which is directly supplied to the common of the motor (see Figure 

3.2-48). Execution of the slit position command(a 4V WORD) controls a 

transistor switch providing power to the 5-volt regulator for the VEM logic. 

Power is also provided to a current source which powers the light emitting 

diodes in the optical encoder, and the motor control power transistors are 

enabled. 

The VEM control circuitry is similar to that used for slant range compensation. The 4V WORD slit command defines one of 16 unique exposure slit widths. 

In the digital magnitude comparator, the four-bit position feedback word is 

compared to the position command and a signal is generated telling the logic 

whether to move the slit and, if so, in which direction. This information 

is fed into a three-state flip-flop circuit along with the centering-bit 

information. Each centering bit indicates an area slightly offset from the 

center of each position so that the area where the two centering bits overlap 

defines the center of the station. The flip-flop output changes to reflect 

the direction information from the comparator only when the center of a 

position is sensed. When the commanded position is reached, the output of 

the centering bits controls the direction of motion to drive the slit to 

the station center. 

The motor is a two-phase four-pole permanent magnet hysteresis, synchronous 

motor which runs at approximately 6500 rpm. This is geared down within the 

motor by 27:1 so that the output shaft of the motor shaft turns at approximately 240 rpm. This motion is applied through the gears in the exposure 

mechanism to both the slit drive and optical encoder shafts. 

The motor is controlled by a four-phase generator which turns on the motor 

power switches in the correct sequence for forward or rearward drive as determined by the output of the flip-flop storage register. The generator, 

G Hand! e vi a BY EM AN 

Control Sys tern On I y 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C050972_2_1 ______________ _ 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD tN 

CD N Q) I CJ) 

CD I-' 

N 

I\) 00 0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

IDP SEEREi G 

Each 5 Amps 

24.5 Volts 

(Unswitched) 

SELECT 

SLIT A 

4V WORD 

Bits 1-4 

Slit Posi ti 

OFF 

on 

A 

'"'"" '"""] 

I ____ _ 

I 

.. J~~--- +5-Volt 

Regulator 

····-.----' To Logic 

A>B 

4-Bit 

Magnitude A<B 

Comparator CBl* and CB2* -- B 

Position Bits I 1-4 

Crystal 

Oscillator ___ .,.. llO · 505 KHz 

NOTE: Chann 

Each 5 Amps 

Switched 24.5-vdc Power 

i 

Slit A Enable/Inhibit 

_____l'!d 

Flip-Flop 4-Phase 

Storage 

~I Generator 

Rwd 

I 

Divider 863,3 Hz 

( ~ 128) 

Channel B is identical. 

*Centering Bits 1 and 2 

---------- -- -~---

**To Bit 4 of IMP 5064 (9 CEA), or, 

IMP 5065 (5 CEA). 

Slit E Enable/Inhibit monitor is 

connec~ed to Bit 3 of the respective 

IMPS. 

~--·---

-- -

Figure 3.2-48. VEM Block Diagram (Channel A) 

vi a BYEMAN 

System Only 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

.~~O_!_OE ~Channel B 

- ~Redundant] 

~·-~ ·--

Power 

Switches 

(4) 

I To Drivers 

I 

b ToPower 

Switch 

I 

I ir!e 2 ~Output 

1~:~:'.~~ 

G 

Current 

Source 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

essentially a four-state ring counter, is cycled by an 863.3 Hz clock signal 

derived from the 110.5 KHz crystal oscillator. The motor power switches 

have controlled rise and fall times to minimize EMI generation inherent with 

fast switching rates. 

When the four-bit position feedback word is equal to the four-bit position 

command word and the centering bits indicate the center of the position, the 

stop sequence is initiated. The ring counter stops cycling and the phases 

are turned off. At the same time a one-shot timer is triggered which causes 

phase four of the motor to be powered for approximately 60 msec. Powering 

phase four by itself provides sufficient braking action to assure the mechanism will stop within the centerband of the position. 

2.5.4.2.4 Data Tracks and Interframe Marker. The data tracks and interframe 

marker electronics in the CEA utilize the same power switch and the same 

5-volt regulator as the SRC circuitry. In addition, there is a 12-volt regulator to supply power to the data track LEDs and the interframe marker 

incandescent lamps (see Figure 3.2-49). 

When the SRC is enabled, power is provided to the interframe marker circuit 

triggering a one-shot timer which powers the interframe marker lamps for 25 

milliseconds. This causes a pair of marks on the film indicating the start 

of a frame. 

The data track electronics receives two timing signals, A and B, from the SCS 

portion of the vehicle, which are generated by the extended command subsystem 

clock. Timing signal B is a 500 Hz square wave. Timing signal A consists of 

a sync pulse followed by a 24-bit time code (least significant bit first) 

which is presented every 200 msec. The time code has a period of 2 ± 0.002 

msec and is synchronized to timing signal B. The inverse of timing signal A 

is logically combined with timing signal B (AB) and the output used to power 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hanctl e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System On 1 y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET -L 

V-1 

N 

I 

....... 

V-1 

0 

24.S vdc 

Switched Power 

(From SRC Switch) 

Timing Al 

Signal B ~I 

+12-Volt 

Regulator 

*Bit 2 of IMP 5064 (9 CEA), 

or IMP 5065 (S CEA). 

I B 

From SRC +S-volt Pegulator 

AB 

Track 

A 

LED 

I 

Inverter 

.. .,..__.,,,.. ... 

I 

+12 Volts 

Power I 

ch 

OneShot 

Timer 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Track 

B 

LED 

Data Track 

Monitor* 

_ I 

I/F 

Mark 

Lamps 

(2) 

Power 

Switch 

OneShot 

Timer 

Figure 3.2-49. Data Track and Interframe Marker Block Diagram 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Contro I System Only TA p "rrstFT G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 ----·-- --

two separate LEDs in the camera. The LED for data track A is mounted 0.05 

inch past the exposure slit centerline (in tenns of film motion) near the 

outer edge of the film. The LED for Track B is placed 0.05 inch before the 

slit and approximately 0. 04 inch inside of Track A. (For reference, see 

the 9 and 5 film formats, Figures 3.2-30 and 3.2-31 respectively). 

2.5.4.2.5 Camera Electronics Assembly Instrumentation. Each CEA unit has 

three internal instrumentation circuits, a current monitor and two eightlevel circuit status monitors. One eight-level point indicates the state 

of the A and B VEM control circuits (enabled/inhibited), and the presence 

or absence of the data track timing signal (AB). The other eight-level 

point indicates the condition of the primary and backup NPA drives (enabled/ 

inhibited), and the presence or absence of the combined timing signal C 

(Cl + C2). The current sensor (IMP 5062 in the 9 subsystem and IMP 5157 

in the 5 subsystem) measures the total current the CEA draws from the 24.5 

vdc power supply, including all logi~ power in the unit, and all power for 

the SRC, NPA and VEM motors. A voltage is developed across a resistor in 

the power return line and amplified to give a transfer function of 1.67 

volts/amp. Since the circuit is not a true differential amplifier, any 

common mode voltage between the 24.5 vdc power return and the instrumentation 

return will be seen at this output. The bandwidth of the current instrumentation monitor is approximately 800 hertz. 

The variable exposure mechanism A and B control circuit enable/inhibit and 

data track instrumentation point (IMP 5064 in the 9 subsystem and IMP 5065 

in the 5 subsystem) produces six valid levels. Since both A and B control 

circuits for the VEM cannot be enabled simultaneously unless a failure has 

occurred, the remaining two possible levels are eliminated. Each VEM power 

switch provides 24.5 volts to an optical coupler connected to one input of 

a four-bit digital/analog (D/A) converter; circuit B to Bit 3, and circuit 

A to Bit 4 (the most significant bit). The data track signal, AB, is used 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

to trip a retriggerable one-shot timer. If the data track signal is absent 

for more than 75 milliseconds, Bit 2 of the D/A converter output will indicate the signal is missing. This point does not indicate that the data 

tracks are being placed on the film as power for the LEDs is available only 

when the SRC power switch is closed. The least significant bit of the D/A 

converter is not used, resulting in an output that varies from 0.25 to 3.25 

vol ts in 0. 6-volt increments for all valid levels. 

The NPA primary and backup enable/inhibit and data signal C instTumentation 

point (IMP 5063 in the 9 subsystem, and IMP 5066 in the 5 subsystem) has 

only four valid levels. Both the primary and backup NPA circuits cannot be 

enabled simultaneously unless there has been a failure, eliminating two 

possible states, and, since the timing signal C logic uses primary NPA 

power, it is not valid for the instrumentation point to indicate the absence 

of timing signal C when the primary NPA is inhibited, eliminating two more 

possible states. 

Each NPA enable switch controls power to one side of an optical coupler, 

with the output of each coupler connected to an input of a four-bit D/A converter; the primary NPA enable to Bit 4 (the most significant bit), and 

the backup NPA enable to Bit 3. Timing signals Cl and C2 are logically combined, and trip a retriggerable one-shot timer, the output of which is fed 

to Bit 2 of the D/A converter. If both timing signals Cl and C2 are absent 

for more than 75 milliseconds, the instrumentation point will indicate the 

loss. The least significant bit of the converter is not used so that the 

valid outputs of this point range from 0. 25 to 3. 25 volts in 0. 6-volt increments, excluding the 0. 85- and 2. 05-vol t levels. 

3.2-132 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Cortrol System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 -----------------

2.6 9 x 5 Dual Platen Camera and Film Handling Subsystem Instrumentation 

Table 3.2-5 summarizes those instrumentation points associated with the 9 

and 5 film handling subsystems. Table 3.2-6 is a summary of those points 

that are related to the 9 x 5 dual platen camera. 

3.2-133 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEt-iAN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP 5ECRE:f _§,_ Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-5 

FILM HANDLING SUBSYSTEM INSTRUMENTATION: 9 AND 5 

IMP 

5015 

tN 

N 

I 

....... 

tN 

..,. 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System On 1 y 

TITLE 

Primary Film Tension (9) 

DESCRIPTION 

A potentiometer and an encoder (which also 

furnishes logic signals to the film control 

electronics) geared to the shaft of the 9 

tension arm, monitor the tension arm position. The associated circuitry, located in 

the 9 supply assembly, combines the outputs 

of the two sensors, producing a signal as 

follows: 

A linear voltage, with two discontinuous 

points, representing tension arm position 

in terms of film quantity. 

a. 9.6 inches - mechanically full: 0.05 

volt 

b. 8,7 inches - electrically full- switch 

point, voltage discontinuity from 0.40 

to O. 94 volt 

c. 4.55 inches - approaching full: 2.5 

volts 

d. 3,5 inches - nominal rest point: 2.9 

volts 

e. 0.3 inch - electrically empty -

switch point, voltage discontinuity 

from 4.05 to 4.60 volts 

POWER 

+5 vdc 

YAP Ci:FFRF:r G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD V-1 Q) 

CJ) N CD I 

I\) !--' 

0 V-1 ...... V1 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

IQP SECRET 

IMP 

-

5376 

5379 

Handle via BYEMAN 

C.Ontrol System Only 

G 

TITLE 

Primary Film Tension 9 

9 Camera Auto OFF, 

5 Camera OFF, 

Camera Auto OFF, 

Altitude Select 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-5 

f. o.o 4. 72 volts 

Values shown will vary 

each specific figures refer to 

the model calibration book. 

the shaft of the 9 

tension arm. The 

d in the 9 supply 

as follows: 

arm 

a. 9.6 full: 0.05 volt 

b. 8.7 1: 0.94 volt 

c. 4.55 full: 2.5 volts 

d. 3.5 rest point: 2.9 volts 

e . 0.3 4.05 volts 

and 

r the camera 

in each camera 

to issue Automatic Camera 

Four relays 

network form a D/A converter 

occurs in 16 discrete steps ranging from a 

0.25 to 4.75 volts in 0.3 volt increments. 

POWER 

+5/±15 vdc 

TAP "rrDrT G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

...... 
TAP ~llit'llll!T G 

IMP TITLE 

5070 Film Tension ) 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD (.;-1 

CD 

Q) N CJ) I 

CD I-' 

v:i I\) °' 0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

Handle via BYEMAH 

System Onl 

TABLE 3. 2-5 

Bit 1 (LSB) 

2 

Bit 3 

Bit 4 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-Rl-80 

DESCRIPTION POWER 

= 9 CAMERA AUTO 

= 5 CAMERA AUTO 

= CA~1ERA 

= ALTITUDE SELECT HIGH/LOW 

and an +5 vdc 

TOP SECREiT _J,i_ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD t.N 

Q) 

CJ) N 

CD I 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

Trill lil~rDFT 

IMP 

5377 

5016 

5017 

5018 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

G 

TITLE 

Film Tension 5 

Primary Film Quantity, 

Coarse (9) 

Primary Film Quant ' Medium (9) 

Primary Film Quantity, 

Fine (9) 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-5 (CONT'd) 

DESCRIPTION 

A potentiometer geared to the 5 tension arm 

shaft, monitors the tension arm position. The 

associated circuitry, located in the film 

handling electronics produces a signal as follows: 

A linear voltage, representing tension arm position 

in terms of film quantity. 

a. 9.4 inches - mechanically full: 0.03 volt 

b. 8.8 inches - electrically full: 1. 0 volt 

c. 6.7 - approaching 1: 1. 85 volts 

d. 5.05 inches - nominal rest point: 2.5 volts 

e. 1. 3 electrically empty: 4.0 volts 

9 film quantity is 

ometers and 

the 9 coarse and potentiometers are to one of an idler roller 

(on the take-up s of the looper) through a 

loaded gear (clutch), gear , and 

gear reducer. A separate spring-loaded gear 

drives the medium potentiometer through another 

gear reducer from the opposite end of same 

roller. Both spring-loaded gears (spring 

clutches) are set to slip at 2 oz.-in. One 

potentiometer cycle (0.5 to 4.5 vdc plus the 

deadband) represents 30.1 feet for the fine, 

240 feet for the medium, and 3490 feet for 

coarse. 

POWER 

+5 vdc 

+S vdc 

+S vdc 

IQ p SEiCIUT 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

G 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

VJ 

N 

I 

~ 

VJ 

00 

TeP SECRET __g_ 

IMP 

5021 

5022 

5023 

5071 

5072 

5073 

5074 

5014 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

TITLE 

Primary Film Quantity, 

Coarse (9) 

Primary Film Quantity, 

Medium (9) 

Primary Film Quantity, 

Fine (9) 

Film Quantity, Medium (5) 

Film Quantity, (5) 

Film Quantity, Medium (5) 

Film Quantity, Fine (5) 

Looper Position (9) 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-5 (CONT'd) 

DESCRIPTION 

Potentiometers, identical to and ganged 

with potentiometers for !MPs 5016, 5017, 

5018, produce redundant instrumentation 

signals. 

A two-section potentiometer assembly, 

with an internal gear ratio of 9.76:1 

between sections, and associated 

s circuitry in the FHE measure 

lm quant The potent 

assembly is to one end 

roller (between the 

looper) through a 

clutch and gear . The 

to sl at 2 oz.-in. One le 

potentiometer (0.25 to 4.75 volts 

deadband) s 29.9 

film; one cycle the medium 

potentiometer, covering same voltage 

range as the , represents 292 . 

A two-section potentiometer identical to 

that used for !MPs 5071 and 5072, and 

geared to the same idler roller, produces 

redundant film quantity instrumentation 

outputs. 

A potentiometer, turned by a spiral roller 

(cam) that is rotated by motion of the 

looper carriage, monitors the position of 

the looper carriage. The associated 

voltage divider network is located in the 

9 supply assembly. The output voltage 

POWER 

+15 vdc 

+15 vdc 

+15 vdc 

+5 vdc 

+5 vdc 

+15 vdc 

+15 vdc 

+5 vdc 

TAP «i;,s:FllFT G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

(.N 

N 

I 

1--' 

(.N 

\.0 

TnP ~Ff'l~T 

IMP 

5020 

5068 

5069 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

G 

TITLE 

Looper Position (9) 

Looper Position (5) 

Looper Position (5) 

TABLE 3.2-5 (CONT'd) 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

DESCRIPTION 

is directly proportional to the amount of 

film in the take-up side of the storage 

looper (or, inversely proportional to the 

amount on the supply side). The output 

range is 0.0 inch (0.72 volt) to 60 inches 

(4.44 volts). Electrically empty and 

full points (referenced to the take-up 

side) for the film control electronics 

logic occur at 17.45 inches (1.80 volts) and 

54.25 inches (4.08 volts) respectively. 

A potentiometer, driven by the opposite end 

of the spiral roller as the potentiometer 

for IMP 5014, produces a redundant looper 

carriage position output signal. 

A potentiometer, turned by a spiral roller 

(cam) that is rotated by motion of the 

5 looper carriage, monitors the position of 

the looper carriage. The associated processing circuitry is located in the FHE. The 

output voltage is directly proportional to 

the amount of film in the take-up side of 

the storage looper (or, inversely proportional to the amount on the supply side). 

The output range is 0.0 inch (0.54 volt) 

to 45 inches (4.45 volts). Electrically 

empty and full points (referenced to the 

take-up side) for the film handling electronics 

occur at 6.5 inches (1.1 volts) and 43.3 

inches (4.31 volts) respectively. 

Redundant case of IMP 5068. The potentiometer 

is driven by the same end of the spiral roller 

cam as the potentiometer for IMP 5068. 

POWER 

+15 vdc 

+5 vdc 

+15 vdc 

TOP SECRET _G_ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., (,-l 

;:a N CD I CD 1--1 Q) .J:>. CJ) 0 CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET __G_ 

IMP 

5298 

5080 

5019 

Handle via BYEMAN 

SRV I 

Take-Up 

SRV 2 

TITLE 

(9 and 5), 

F Path Pressure 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-5 

DESCRIPTION 

1 

of a pivoting arm anc 

on the film wrap wher 

near tull and drives a mechanical 

, closes when the 

is 500 feet for the 9 

based on 0.002 inch thick 

The two - et work the 9 x 

roduce a four-state - -

1. 2.0 volts - 9 spool not full 

5 spool not I 

2. 2.5 volts 9 . 5 1 1 

3. 3.0 volts 9 soool 1 

5 . 4. 4.5 volts - 9 spool 1 

5 soool I 

the 9 

1 states for the 

SRV 2. . 

A 

pressures ot the inside 

enclosure with respect to 

coil is located on each side 

a 

corresthe 

POWER 

+15 vdc 

+15 vdc 

24.5 vdc (DTU 

switched power) 

The 

volts)-to 4.63nun 

0 mm of Hg 

TOP :>FCRFT ~ G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) V-1 CJ) . CD N .. I I\) f--' 0 .j:>. ...... f--' -J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET .-.G.-

IMP 

5591 

5269 

5267 

5593 

5077 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Cont ro 1 Sys tE!fl On 1 y 

TITLE 

9 OP Voltage Monitor 

Supply Motor Current (9) 

Primary Take-up Current 

1 and 2 (9) 

5 OP Voltage Monitor 

Supply Motor Current (5) 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-5 (CONT'D) 

DESCRIPTION 

A two-resistor voltage divider network 

connected across the 9 OP power feed in 

the PM&C monitors the voltage level. Output 

is digitized in the DTU to yield a binary 

signal (On/Off). 

"0" ;:: Off 

"l" = On 

Resistors in the supply power return lines 

(forward and reverse) generate voltages 

proportional to the supply motor current 

plus bias current for the drive circuitry . 

The outputs are amplified and combined in 

the film control electronics module producing 

a linear signal from -7 amperes (0.5 volt) 

reverse-drive current to +7 amperes (5.0 

volts) forward-drive current . 

A resistor in the power return line from 

the 9 spool drive motors on take-up 1 and 

take-up 2 generates a voltage proportional 

to the combined current drawn by the two motors 

(they are driven simultaneously only during the 

switchover from T/U 1 to T/U 2, i.e., during the 

period between execution of 9 SPLICE/CUT and 

9 ROLL-IN TERrv1INATE). The output is amplified 

in the film control electronics producing a 

linear signal from 0.0 ampere (0.5 volt) to 3.1 

amperes (5 volts). 

Similar to IMP 5591, monitors the on/off 

status of 5 operational power. 

Similar to IMP 5269, but located in the film 

handling electronics module, IMP 5077 monitors 

POWER 

Self 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

Self 

±15 vdc 

TA8 C:1ii 081iiY IV r "''-"-"'-' G __ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

vi 

Q) N CJ) I CD ...... 

.;::.. I\) N 0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET 

IMP 

5378 

5075 

5124 

Handle via BYEMAN 

System Only 

G 

TITLE 

Supply Brake Current 

Secondary Take-Up Motor 

Current 1 and 2 (5) 

Supply Brake Current (5) 

BIF-008- · W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-5 (CONT'D) 

DESCRIPTION 

the 5 supply motor current. The output is 

piecewise linear ranging from -5.4 amperes 

(0 vdc) to 0.0 ampere (2.3 vdc) for 

reverse drive, and from 0.0 ampere (2.7 vdc) 

to +6 amperes (4.9 vdc) for forward drive. 

The monitor output is 2.5 vdc with the 

bidrive disabled. The discontinuity between 

2.3 vdc and 2.7 vdc is caused by the current 

sense resistors also measuring the bidrive 

circuitry bias currents. 

The brake current shall be monitored, so that 

a 0 to 1. ampere brake current a 0 ±0.2 

5 ±0.2 volts de ion 

1 be lable. The output transfer 

shall be linear. 

lar to IMP 5267 , 

the combined motor current take-up 

spool motors on T/U 1 and T/U 2. Both motors 

receive power only during the period between 

execution of 5 SPLICE/CUT and 5 ROLL IN TERMINATE. 

The output is linear from 0.0 ampere (0.25 volt) 

to 2.0 amperes (4.75 volts). 

The currents the primary and backup release 

coils in the 5 supply brake are monitored by 

resistors in the return lines within the film 

handling electronics module. The two signals are 

combined and amplified within the FHE to produce 

a linear signal from 0.08 ampere (0.5 volt) to 0.4 

ampere (4.6 volts). The signal is nonlinear below 

0.08 ampere with the IMP output reaching its lower 

voltage limit (0.25 volt) at 0.04 ampere. Accuracy 

of the IMP is such that it is able to indicate only 

POWER 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

G 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD (.N 

. I\) N 0 I ...... ...... -J .f:>. 

--

0 (.N 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET _Ji_ 

IMP 

5616 

5134 

5033 

TITLE 

5 Parking Brake Vol 

Monitor 

Environmental Current 

Branch 2, and 5 Parking 

Brake Current 

9 NPA Prime/BU, 

5 NPA Prime/BU, 

T/U Enable/Inhibit 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-5 (CONT'D) 

DESCRIPTION 

the presence or absence of a brake coil load 

as indicated below: 

E * < 1.0 v 

0 

1.15 v < E

0 < 3.0 v 

E > 3.05 v 

0 

Brake Engaged 

One coil energized, 

brake disengaged 

Both coils zed, 

brake disengaged 

A two-res voltage divider network across 

the 5 parking brake power in the PM&C 

monitors the vo level. Output is z 

the to a binary 

11 011 Off 

"l" = 

A resistor in the branch 2 and 5 parking brake 

power return line in the PM&C a vol 

proportional to current flowing. The output 

is amplified in the PM&C producing a linear signal 

from 0.0 ampere (0.18 volt) to 5.0 amperes 

(4.9 volts). 

Latching relays tracking the command input 

relays of the command processor monitor the 

receipt of commands from the satellite control 

section and feed either 0.0 volt or 5.0 volts 

to an integrated circuit D/A converter. Three 

relays and one 4-bit D/A converter form the IMP. 

Output ranges from 0.25 volt to 1.15 volts and 

2.65 volts to 3.55 volts in 0.3 volt increments 

within each range. 

POWER 

Self 

±15 vdc 

+5/±15 vdc 

*E

0 represents the instrumentation point output voltage. 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only TAP ~llif'IFT _G_ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a (.,.1 

CD 

CD N Q) I CJ) ....... .. 

CD ~ 

I\) ~ 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

"? 

"fOP 5ECREI ~ 

IMP 

5119 

5121 

5003 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

TITLE -

CBM for IEU (Number 5) 

CBM for IEU (Number 6) 

Environmental Branches 

1, 2, and 4, and 5 

Parking Brake On/Off 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-5 (CONT'D) 

DESCRIPTION POWER 

Bit 1 (LSB) = 5 NPA Prime/BU 

Bit 2 = 9 NPA Prime/BU 

Bit 3 ::::: N/C 

Bit 4 (MSB) = T/U Enable/Inhibit 

A command bit monitor (CBM), consisting of +15 vdc 

latching relays in parallel with the 

command re of the IEU, monitors the 

receipt of commands from the satellite )> 

control section. Four relays and a resis- "O 

"O 

tance network form a D/A converter whose ..., 0 

output occurs in 16 crete ranging < CD 

c. from 0.25 volt to 4.75 volts in 0.3-volt -

0 increments: ..., 

;:a 

CD 

1 (LSB) 2A CD 

= Q) 

CJ) 

CD 2 = lA . . 

I\) 

0 

Bit 3 s A ...... 

-J 

-- Bit 4 (MSB) 9 S/C A 0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

Similar to IMP 5119 +5 vdc 0"1 

0 

co 

Bit 1 (LSB) = C/S 2B -J 

I\) 

"? 

Bit 2 C/S lB 

Bit 3 5 S/C B 

Bit 4 (MSB) = 9 S/C B 

Similar to IMP 5033, with an output from +5/±15 vdc 

0.25 volt to 4.75 volts in 0.3-volt increments: 

Bit 1 (LSB) = Env. Branch 1 On/Off 

Bit 2 :: Env. Branch 2 On/Off 

Bit 3 = S Parking Brake On/Off 

Bit 4 (MSB) ::: Env. Branch 4 On/Off 

I 0 I' SECIU~T G 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD V'l Q) 

CJ) . CD 

.. N 

I I\) 1--' 0 

...... .i;::.. 

-J V1 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SiCAiT .L 

IMP 

5013 

5076 

5235 

5236 

Handle via BYE.MAN 

Control System Only 

TITLE 

Temperature, Primary Film 

Supply 

Temperature, Secondary 

Film Supply 

Temperature, SRV 2 

Film T/U Assembly 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-5 (CONT'D) 

DESCRIPTION 

A thermistor, mounted on the back of the 

9 film quantity sensor assembly, monitors 

the temperature near the 9 supply spool. 

The output scaled in the instrumentation 

processor producing a nonlinear signal from 

lOF (4.75 volts) to 130F (0.54 volt). 

A thermistor, mounted on the +Y side of the 

5 supply frame near the supply spool support, 

monitors the supply temperature. The output 

seal in 

a nonl 

130F (0.54 volt). 

thermistor is 

cross member, and is 

just below (-Z) the 5 wobble 

output is in 

instrumentation processor, result in a 

nonl signal from lOF (4.75 volts) to 

130F (0.54 volt). 

Similar to IMP 5235, monitors the temperature 

of T/U 2. 

POWER 

+15 vdc 

+15 vdc 

+15 vdc 

+15 vdc 

TOP SiCAET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a V-1 

CD 

CD l'0 

Q) I 

CJ) ....... 

CD """ 

I\) °' 0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET G 

IMP 

5092 

5097 

5098 

5156 

5606 

5607 

5608 

5609 

5610 

5611 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

BIF-008~ W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-6 

9X5 DUAL PLATEN CAi\1ERA INSTRUMENTATION 

TITLE 

FPLL Current Monitor (9) 

FPLL Loop Diagnostic (9) 

FPLL Current Monitor (5) 

FPLL Loop Diagnostic (5) 

9 Film Velocity, Count 1 

9 Film Velocity, Count 2 

9 Film Velocity, Count 4 

9 Film Velocity, Count 8 

9 Film Velocity, Count 16 

9 Film Velocity, Count 32 

DESCRIPTION 

The current drawn by 9 FPLLE sides A and 

B is sensed by a dropping resistor in the 

return line for each side. The signals 

are amplified, summed, and delivered to 

the instrumentation processor. Since 

both sides cannot be operated simultaneously, the signal represents the ON 

side current drain. The output is linear 

from 0.0 ampere (0 volt) to 3.0 amperes 

(5.0 volts), with a bandwidth of 100 Hz. 

The outputs from the 9 FPLLE loop filters 

(side A and side B) are summed, and delivered to the instrumentation processor 

as a voltage representing encoder phase 

lag (with respect to the drive reference 

signal). Output is linear from 0 degree 

(0./ volt) to 268 degrees (5.0 volts). 

Similar to IMP 5092; monitors the 5 FPLLE 

current drain. 

Similar to IMP 5097; monitors the 5 FPLLE 

phase error. 

The velocity of the film being transferred 

by the camera from the supply side to the 

take-up side of the storage looper is 

monitored by a 100-line optical encoder 

attached to a film path idler roller. The 

optical encoder produces pulses which are 

POWER 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

+5 vdc 

TOP SiCRE.I G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

~-G 

IMP 

-

5612 

5613 

5598 

5599 

5600 

5601 

5602 tN 5603 N 

I 5604 ...... 

+:> 5605 '-I 

5591 

5593 

Handle via BYEMAN 

C:Ontrol System Only 

TITLE 

9 Film Velocity, Count 64 

9 Film Velocity, Count 128 

5 Film Velocity, Count 1 

5 Film Velocity, Count 2 

5 Film Velocity, Count 4 

5 Film Velocity, Count 8 

5 Film Velocity, Count 16 

5 Film Velocity, Count 32 

5 Film Velocity, Count 64 

5 Film Velocity, Count 128 

9 OP Voltage Monitor 

5 OP Voltage Monitor 

TABLE 3.2-6 Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

DESCRIPTION 

used to increment an eightcounter. The counter runs 

from 0 to 255, resetting on the next 

and continuing. Each bit is fed to a 

discrete input in the above DTU yielding 

eight instrumentation points, each indicatlfon or n1 11 state of a single bit 

Similar to IMPs 5606-5613; monitors the 

5 film velocity . 

A two-resistor voltage divider network 

connected across the 9 operational power 

feed in the PM and C monitors the 9 OP 

voltage level. Output is digitized in 

the DTU to yield a binary signal (ON/OFF). 

"0" = OFF 

lfl" == ON 

Similar to IMP 5591; monitors the ON/OFF 

status of 5 operational power. 

POWER 

~ +5 vdc 

+5 vdc 

+5 vdc 

Self 

Self 

IOI"' :StCl<tl 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

.. 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

G 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRE:r 

(J.l 

N 

I 

....... 

.;;:. 

()0 

IMP 

5025 

5026 

5030 

5031 

5051 

5052 

5053 

5054 

5049 

Handle vi a BY EM AH 

Control System Only 

G 

TITLE 

Platen Position, Fine (9) 

Platen Position, Coarse (9) 

Platen Position, Fine (9) 

Platen Position, Coarse (9) 

Platen Position, Fine (5) 

Platen Position, Coarse (5) 

Platen Position, Fine (5) 

Platen Position, Coarse (5) 

Slit Position (9) 

TABLE 3.2-6 (CONT'D) BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

DESCRIPTION 

Fine and coarse potentiometers with 

associated voltage divider networks 

are located in the 9 focus adjust 

mechanism gearbox. The outputs are 

linear over the full range of platen 

travel (±12 mils). The coarse potentiometer cycles once (0.0 to 5.0 

volts) over the full 24-mil range, 

while the fine potentiometer cycles 

once for each 2 mils of motion. The 

output levels are centered around 0.0 

mil (2.5 volts). 

Redundant case of IMPs 5025 and 5026. 

The potentiometers are ganged with 

those used to generate IMPs 5025 and 

5026. 

Identical to IMPs 5025 and 5026. The 

potentiometers are located in the 5 

focus adjust mechanism gearbox and monitor the position of the 5 platen. 

Redundant case of IMPs 5051 and 5052. 

The potentiometers are ganged with 

those for IMPs 5051 and 5052. 

A potentiometer geared to the 9 variable exposure mechanism (slit mechanism) 

drive shaft monitors the slit position. 

The associated voltage divider network 

is located on the VEM assembly. The 

potentiometer is rotated approximately 

500 degrees from steps 1 to 16, generaPOWER 

+5 vdc 

+5 vdc 

+15 vdc 

+15 vdc 

+5 vdc 

+5 vdc 

+15 vdc 

+15 vdc 

+5 vdc 

TAP :5EC"DFT _G_ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD t;.:i 

Q) N CJ) 

CD I 

...... I\) .i:::. 

0 \0 ...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

__§_ 

IMP TITLE 

5050 Slit Position 

5055 Slit Position 

5056 Slit Pos 

5063 Primary NPA Enable/ 

NPA Enabl 

Data C 

* Least Significant Bit 

** Most Significant Bit 

Handle via BYE.MAN 

C.On tro l System On 1 y 

TABLE 3.2-6 BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

DESCRIPTION POWER 

_ sl 

.0 to 

travel. 

than one voltage cycle 

for the full range of 

Redundant case of IMP 5049. The potent 

ometer is ganged with the potentiometer 

used for IMP 5049. 

Identical to IMP 

tion of the 5 slit 

volts in 0. 

0.85-volt 

* 

IMP 

slit 

= No connection 

= Data signal C 

posito 

to 3.25 

the 

Bit 1 

Bit 2 

3 

Bit 4 

= Rill NPA enable/inhibit 

** NPA enable/inhibit 

+15 vdc 

+5 vdc 

+15 vdc 

±15 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET __§.__ 

IMP 

5066 

5064 

(J,j 

N 

I 

..., 

(J1 

0 

5065 

5062 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 

TITLE 

Primary NPA Enable/Inhibit, 

B/U NPA Enable/Inhibit, 

Data Signal C (5) 

Slit A 

Slit B 

Data Tracks (9) 

Slit A Enable/Inhibit, 

Slit B Enable/Inhibit, 

Data Tracks 

DREA Current 

TABLE 3.2-6 BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

DESCRIPTION POWER 

Identical to IMP 5063; monitors the NPA 

data signal C functions in the 5 

camera electronics assembly. 

A four-bit D/A converter in the 9 camera 

assembly indicates the enable 

status of the A and B VEM circuits, and 

whether or not the data track signal is 

The data track signal (AB) is 

used to trigger a retriggerable one-shot 

timer so that if the signal is absent 

for more than 0.075 sec the D/A converter 

will indicate the signal is missing. The 

varies from 0.25 volt to 3.25 

volts in 0.6-volt increments for all 

valid states. 

Bit 1 

Bit 2 

Bit 3 

Bit 4 

No Connection 

Data Tracks 

Slit B Enable/Inhibit 

= Slit A Enable/Inhibit 

to IMP 5064, monitors the VEM 

track functions in the 5 camera 

electronics assembly. 

A dropping resistor in the power-return 

line senses the total current the 9 camera 

assembly draws from the 24.5 

power supply, including all logic 

plus motor power in the SRC, NPA, 

and VEM. The current signal is amplified 

to give an output range of 0.0 to 5.0 

volts for 0.0 to 3.0 amps, with a bandwidth of 800 Hz. 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

11 ,., 'lllliFBFT G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

T.SECRET. 

VJ 

N 

I 

I-' 

(J1 

I-' 

IMP 

5157 

5029 

5036 

Handle via BYEMAN 

C.Ontrol System Only 

TITLE 

DREA Current ( 5) 

9 Camera ~"1 ~· • , 

5 Camera ON/OFF, 

9 OP ON/OFF, 

5 OP 

9 OPS Counter Bits 1,2,3, 

Spare 

Bl F-OOB- w-c-140-RI-BO. 

TABLE 3.2-6 

DESCRIPTION 

IMP 5062; monitors current 

5 camera electronics 

relays tracking the 

relays of the command processor 

monitor the receipt of commands from 

satellite control section and feed 

either 0.0 volt or 5.0 volts to an inconverter. Four 

converter form 

occurs in 16 discrete 

__ from 0.25 volt to 4.75 

volts in 0.3-volt increments: 

Bit l 

Bit 2 

Bit 3 

4 

Similar 

each 

been 

Bit l 

Bit 2 

Bit 3 

Bit 4 

::: 9 

S Camera 

= 9 OP 

= 5 OP 

5029; a counter circuit 

converter increments at 

OFF command that has 

a 9 film drive ON com-

= No connection 

9 OPS counter Bit l 

9 OPS counter Bit 2 

= 9 OPS counter Bit 3 

The circuit is a binary counter running 

from 0 to 7, resetting to 0 at the next 

continuing. 

POWER 

±15 vdc 

+5/±15 vdc 

+5/±15 vdc 

TOP SECRET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
TOP SECRET __£... Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

3.2-6 (CONT'D) 

IMP TITLE DESCRIPTION POWER -

S037 5 OPS Counter Bits 1,2,3 Similar to IMP S036; counts the number +5/±lS vdc 

Spare of 5 film drive ON/OFF command pairs: 

Bit 1 (LSB) = No connection 

Bit 2 S OPS counter Bit 1 

3 = 5 OPS counter Bit 2 

Bit 4 (MSB) = 5 OPS counter Bit 3 

SOOS 9 FPLL Select Side A, Similar to IMP S029: +5/±lS vdc 

9 FPLL Select Side B, 

)> 5 FPLL Select Side A, Bit 1 (LSB) = 9 FPLL select Side A )> 

"O "O "O S FPLL Side B Bit 2 :::: 9 FPLL B "O ..., ..., 0 Bit 3 5 FPLL select A 0 

< = < CD Bit 4 (MSB) 5 FPLL select B CD c. = c. 

-

0 -0 ..., ..., ;:a (.N 5046 Stereo lar to IMP 5029: ±lS vdc ;:a 

CD . ' CD 

CD N CD I Q) ' ...... 1 (LSB) ereo Bit 1 Q) 

CJ) CJ) 

CD V1 CD 

N High/Normal Bit 2 = Stereo Bit 2 

I\) I\) 

0 Bit 3 CP select A/B 0 ...... ...... -J Bit 4 (MSB) ::: FPLL range high/ -J 

--

0 --0 I\) normal I\) 

-- -- ...... ...... .j:>. .j:>. 

() S027 FDS Bits 1,2,3,4 Similar to IMP S029: +S/±lS vdc () 

0 0 0'1 0'1 0 0 co Bit 1 (LSB) ::: FDS Bit 1 (MSB) co -J -J 

I\) Bit 2 FDS Bit 2 I\) 

"? "? 

Bit 3 ::: FDS Bit 3 

Bit 4 (MSB) ::: FDS Bit 4 

5028 FDS Bits S,6,7,8 Similar to IMP 5029: +5/±15 vdc 

1 (LSB) ::: FDS Bit S 

Bit 2 = FDS Bit 6 

Bit 3 = FDS Bit 7 

4 (MSB) = FDS Bit 8 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

~ BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.2-6 

V-1 

N 

I 

...... 

VI 

VI 

IMP 

5032 

5024 

5007 

5033 

5000 

TITLE 

PCM 1 nN 1mn:; * 

PCM 2 ~ .. , "" , , 

FDS Bits 9,10 

9 Focus 

Inhibit, 

9 

5 Focus 

Inhibit, 

5 

, Sl-PRG 

le 

Sl-PRG 

9 Slit Bits 1,2,3,4 

*PCM is an alternate notation for DTU. 

Hand! e vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 

DESCRIPTION 

Similar to IMP 5029: 

Bit 1 (LSB) = PCM 1 

Bit 2 = PCM 2 

Bit 3 = FDS 

4 (MSB) = FDS Bit 

Similar to IMP 5029: 

Bit 1 (LSB) 9 Focus Drive 

Inhibit 

Bit 2 = 

Bit 3 = 

Bit 4 (M~RI = 

1 

2 

3 

Bit 4 

= 9 Slit 

= 9 Slit 

9 Slit 

= 9 Slit 

Bit 1 (LSB) 

2 

Bit 3 

Bit 4 

POWER 

--

+5/±15 vdc 

+5/±15 vdc 

+ ±15 vdc 

+5/±15 vdc 

+5/±15 vdc 

TOf SECIU!T G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TAP c:;,;:r11;:r _J,i_ 

IMP 

5001 

5006 

(.N 5047 

N 

I 

...... 

01 

.i::. 

5057 

5060 

Handle via BYE.MAN 

Control System Only 

TITLE 

5 Slit Bits 1,2,3,4 

9 Slit Enable/Inhibit 

9 Slit Select A/B, 

5 Slit Enable/Inhibit 

5 Slit Select A/B 

Data and SRC, 

9 Enable/ 

9 Enable/Di , 

5 e/Inhibit, 

5 le 

Temperature, Camera 

Housing 

Temperature, 5 Tilt 

Frame 

TABLE 3.2-6 (CONT'D) BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

DESCRIPTION 

Similar to IMP 5029: 

Bit l (LSB) = 5 Slit Bit l (LSB) 

Bit 2 5 Slit Bit 2 

Bit 3 = 5 Slit Bit 3 

Bit 4 (MSB) 5 Slit Bit 4 (MSB) 

Similar to IMP 5029: 

Bit 1 (LSB) 

Bit 2 

Bit 3 

Bit 4 (MSB) 

9 SI Enable/Inhibit 

9 Sl Select A/B 

= 5 SI Enable/Inhibit 

= 5 Slit Select A/B 

Similar to IMP 5029: 

Bit 1 (LSB) 

Bit 2 

Bit 3 

Bit 4 (MSB) 

= 9 le/Inhibit 

9 Enable/D e = 5 e/Inhibit 

5 Enable/Di 

A thermistor mounted on the +Z surface 

of the camera housing, centered on the 

X axis at approximately Station 79.2, 

monitors the internal temperature. 

The output processed in the housing, 

producing a nonlinear signal from 30F 

(4.82 volts) to lOOF (1.02 volts). 

A thermistor mounted on the outer side 

of the 5 tilt frame near the platen 

drive motor monitors the frame temperature. Processing circuitry is located 

in the camera housing. The output is 

linear from 60F (4.5 volts) to 80F 

0.87 volt). 

POWER 

+5/±15 vdc 

+5/±15 vdc 

15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

"TO p SECRE..T _G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

.. 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 10 

'co 

'-J 

i I\) 

! I\) 

, ...... 

IMP 

5061 

5110 

vi 

. 

N 

I 

..... 

tn 

tn 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

TITLE 

Temperature, 9 Tilt Frame 

Temperature, Corrector, 

Camera Spacer 

TABLE 3.2-6 BlF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

DESCRIPTION 

Similar to IMP 5060. The thermistor is 

mounted on the outer edge of the 9 tilt 

near the olaten drive motor. 

A thermistor, mounted on the +Z surface 

of the RCFLA housin~, monitors the temPOWER 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

Processis located in the 

instrumentation processor, generating a 

linear si~nal from 60F (4.75 volts) to 

80F (1.06 

iu P S!CRE:'f G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

This page intentionally left blank. 

3.2-156 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAH 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.7 Command Summary 

The following subsections summarize the commands controlling the 9 x 5 dual 

platen camera and film handling subsystem. For an explanation of command 

bit structure, refer to Part 3, Section 9. 

2.7.l CP Select Commands 

CP A SELECT (N02663, N01663, N03663) 

CP B SELECT (N02666, N01666, N03666) 

Function: 

Comments: 

These commands choose the "A CHANNEL" or "B CHANNEL" electronics in the command processor for control of the crab 

servo and stereo servo. The commands also choose which 

CP channel will process the 9 OP and 5 OP commands. 

(1) Both Channel A and Channel B circuits are completely 

capable of handling all servo and all 9 and 5 OP 

commands. They can be used interchangeably. Any 

combination of Decoder A or B, CP A or B, 9 FPLLE A 

or B, 5 FPLLE A or B, 9 Slit A or B and 5 Slit A or 

B may be used. There is no requirement to use all 

A's or all B's at the same time. 

(2) Erroneous instrumentation and reverse power control 

logic will result if the sides of the CP are switched 

while either 9 or 5 operational power is ON. 

3.2-157 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System On I y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008-_ W-~=019840-RI-80 

2.7.2 Operational Power Commands 

2.7.2.1 OP On 

9 OP ON* (Nl2054, Nll054, Nl3054) 

5 OP ON** (Nl2055, Nll055, Nl3055) 

Function: The OP ON commands switch camera operating power for 

the indicated camera systems. The following units receive power when the indicated commands are executed: 

Interlocks: 

Stereo Servo (9 Qr 5 OP ON) 

Crab Servo (9 or 5 OP ON) 

9 FPLLE (9 OP ON) 

5 FPLLE (5 OP ON) 

Film Control Electronics (9 OP ON) 

Film Handling Electronics (5 OP ON) 

If 9 SRC DISABLE or 5 SRC DISABLE have disabled an SRC 

mechanism, execution of OP ON for that system will reset the disabled SRC, allowing power application to the 

associated SRC, data track and interframe marker electronics. 

(1) The OP ON command is required in a camera system 

to permit that system to operate; i.e., 9 OP ON 

for the 9 system and 5 OP ON for the 5 system. 

(2) Operational power for a system is required for 

take-up operation in that camera system. Film 

take-up requires 3.0 seconds (3.5 seconds for 

the 9 system when there is less than 500 feet, 

or more than 4000 feet of film on the spool, and 

the drive voltage is less than 24.5 vdc). 

*9 OP ON will turn on the 9 T/U drive briefly. If the take-up looper 

is not empty, it will initiate a take-up cycle. 

**5 OP ON will turn on the 5 supply drive briefly. 

3.2-158 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control Sys tern On l y 
2.7.2.2 OP Off 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

(3) Either the 9 or the 5 operational power must be 

ON for execution of crab or stereo angle changes 

commanded by a 13V WORD. 

(4) Commanding 5 OP ON will disable the 5 parking 

brake circuit. 5 OP OFF will remove the disable 

if the 5 parking brake power is OFF. Otherwise, 

the disable will not be removed until both 5 OP 

and 5 parking brake power are OFF. 

9 OP* OFF (N12050, Nll050, Nl3050) 

5 OP** OFF (Nl2056, Nll056, N13056) 

Function: The indicated OP OFF commands remove camera operating 

power from: 

Interlocks: 

9 FPLLE (9 OP OFF) 

5 FPLLE (5 OP OFF) 

Film Control Electronics (9 OP OFF) 

Film Handling Electronics (5 OP OFF) 

Stereo Servo (9 and 5 OP OFF) 

Crab Servo (9 and 5 OP OFF) 

5 OP OFF will enable the 5 parking 

the 5 parking brake power is OFF. 

disable will not be removed until 

parking brake power are OFF. 

brake circuit if 

Otherwise, the~ 

both 5 OP and 5 

2.7.2.3 Additional Commands Affecting Operational Power 

The following commands, described in the subsections referenced, also control operational power in addition to other functions: 

*9 OP OFF will turn on the 9 T/U drive briefly, if 9 OP is already off. 

**5 OP OFF will turn on the 5 T/U drive briefly, if 5 OP is already off. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Command 

9/5 RUNOUT ON 

9 OFF 

5 OFF 

9/5 OFF 

BI F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Subsection 

2.7.4.6 

2.7.4.7 

2.7.4.7 

2.7.4.7 

2.7.3 5 Parking Brake 

2.7.3.1 5 Parking Brake On 

HEATER POWER AND 5 PARKING BRAKE ON (N02661, N01661, N03661) 

Function: This command provides power to the 5 parking brake and 

to all heater branches, including EPSM 1 and EPSM 2. 

Interlocks: Commanding 5 OP ON or 9/5 RUNOUT ON will disable the 

5 parking brake circuit. Removing 5 operational power 

(5 OP OFF; 9/5 OFF; 5 OFF) will remove the disable if 

the 5 parking brake power is OFF. Otherwise, the 

disable will not be removed until both 5 OP and 5 

parking brake power are OFF. 

2.7.3.2 5 Parking Brake Off 

5 PARKING BRAKE OFF (N02651, N01651, N03651) 

Function: Removes power from the 5 parking brake. 

Interlocks: 5 PARKING BRAKE OFF enables the 5 parking brake circuit if it was disabled by turning ON operational 

power and the 5 parking brake power was ON at the 

time 5 operational power was turned OFF. 

2.7.3.3 5 Parking Brake On/Off (M6V WORD) 

M6V002YZ (bits 35-37) 

Function: This command controls the 5 parking brake, the DTU 

states, and the heater branch circuits. 

3.2-160 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

_G_ 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-Kl-8U 

Bit No. Function 

Implicit Spare 

33-1 DTU 1 ON 

33-0 DTU 1 OFF 

34-1 DTU 2 ON 

34-0 DTU 2 OFF 

35-1 5 Parking Brake, and Heater Branches 

1,2,4,5, and 6 ON 

35-0 5 Parking Brake, and Heater Branches 

1,2,4,5, and 6 OFF 

36-1 EPSM 1 ON 

36-0 EPSM 1 OFF 

37-1 EPSM 2 ON 

37-0 EPSM 2 OFF 

38-1 Spare 

38-0 Spare 

Interlocks: Commanding 5 OP ON or 9/5 RUNOUT ON will disable the 

5 parking brake circuit. Removing 5 operational power 

(5 OP OFF, 9/5 OFF, 5 OFF) will remove the disable, if 

the 5 parking brake power is OFF. Otherwise, the diS::-

able will not be removed until both 5 OP and 5 

parking brake power are OFF. 

2.7.3.4 Additional Commands Affecting the 5 Parking Brake 

The following commands, described in the referenced subsections also affect 

the 5 parking brake in addition to other functions: 

Command 

5 OP ON 

5 OP OFF 

9/5 RUNOUT ON 

9/5 OFF 

5 OFF 

3.2-161 

Subsection 

G 

2.7.2.1 

2.7.2.2 

2.7.4.6 

2.7.4.7 

2.7.4.7 

Approve_qfor Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.7.4 Film Drive Commands 

2.7.4.1 FPLLE SELECT Commands 

9 FPLLE A SELECT (N12037, N11037, N13037) 

9 FPLLE B SELECT (N12051, N11051, N13051) 

5 FPLLE A SELECT (N12052, N11052, Nl3052) 

5 FPLLE B SELECT (N12053, N11053, N13053) 

Function: 

Comments: 

These commands assign subsequent commands for filmdri ve speed to two of the four frequency phase lock 

loop electronics channels for providing film drive 

and control when film drive is commanded by a 14V 

WORD. 

Any combinations of Decoder A or B, CP CHANNEL A or 

B, 9 FPLLE A or B, 5 FPLLE A or B, 9 Slit A or B, 

and 5 Slit A or B may be used. There is no requirement to use all A's or all B's at the same time. 

2.7.4.2 9/5 FPLLE NORMAL SPEED RANGE Command 

(N12036, N11036, N13036) 

Function: 

Comments: 

This command causes subsequent 14V WORD film drive 

commands to be executed within the low-speed ranges 

of the selected 9 and the selected 5 frequency 

phase lock loop electronics. This will result in 

film-drive speed commands being executed in the 

3.37 to 11.8 inches per second range. 

(1) The command may be given before or after the A 

or B FPLLEs are selected for each camera system. 

(2) Both the 9 and the 5 camera systems are set to 

the normal range by this command and will remain 

there until the HIGH SPEED RANGE is commanded. 

3.2-162 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-IU-80 

2.7.4.3 9/5 FPLLE HIGH SPEED RANGE Command 

(N12034, N11034, N13034) 

Function: 

Comments: 

This command causes subsequent 14V WORD film drive commands to be executed within the high-speed ranges of 

the selected 9 and the selected 5 frequency phase lock 

loop electronics. This will result in film-drive speed 

commands being executed in the 6.74 to 23.6 inches per 

second range. 

(1) The command may be given before or after the A or 

B FPLLEs are selected for each camera system. 

(2) Both the 9 and the 5 camera systems are set to the 

high range by this command and will remain there 

until the NORMAL SPEED RANGE is selected. 

(3) The camera rate must not be allowed to exceed the 

take-up rate on long-strip photographs. Various 

combinations of film-drive speeds, supply voltages, 

and film quantities on take-ups can produce such a 

situation. 

2.7.4.4 Film Drive ON/OFF (14V WORD) 

14V WORD (14V4bbWXYZ, bits 25-38, Implicit) 

Function: This command commences and terminates photography in 

the 9 and the 5 systems. Either system may be operated individually or both may be used simultaneously. 

Only one film-drive speed (FDS) can be held in the CP 

at a given time. This FDS will be used by whichever 

system(s) is (are) operating. The command implicitly 

removes power from the 9 and 5 slit mechanism control 

electronics and inhibits both the 9 and the 5 take-up 

drives. The command also stores the stereo position 

to which the stereo mirror is to move upon receipt of 

a 13V WORD command. 

3.2-163 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bit No. 

Implicit Bit 

25-1 

25-0 

26-1 

26-0 

27-1 ·} 27-0 

28-1 

28-0 

29-1} 

29-0 

30-1} 

30-0 

31-1} 

31-0 

32-1} 

32-0 

33-1} 

33-0 

34-1} 

34-0 

35-1} 

35-0 

Bl F-008-_ W-C-019840-RI-80 

Function 

9/5 Slit OFF, 9/5 Take-up Inhibit 

9 Film Drive (9 FPLLE) ON, 9 SRC ON, 

9 Data Track and 9 Interframe Marker 

ON 

9 Film Drive (9 FPLLE) OFF, 9 SRC OFF, 

9 Data Track and 9 Interframe Marker 

OFF 

5 Film Drive (5 FPLLE) ON, 5 SRC ON, 5 

Data Track and 5 Interframe Marker ON 

5 Film Drive (5 FPLLE) OFF, 5 SRC OFF, 

5 Data Track and 5 Interframe Marker 

OFF 

Stereo Position for the Stereo Mirror at 

Next 13V WORD: 

Mirror Position Stored 

(Degrees) 27 28 

+8.65 (Forward) 0 0 

0.0 (Vertical) 0 1 

-8.65 (Aft) 1 0 

-8.65 (Aft) 1 1 

Film-Drive Speed Bit 10 (LSB) 

Film-Drive Speed Bit 9 

Film-Drive Speed Bit 8 

Film-Drive Speed Bit 7 

Film-Drive Speed Bit 6 

Film-Drive Speed Bit 5 

Film-Drive Speed Bit 4 and SRC Bit 4 (LSB) 

3.2-164 

G 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bit No. 

36-1} 

36-0 

37-1} 

37-0 

38-1 } 

38-0 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 ------------- --

Function 

Film-Drive Speed Bit 3 and SRC Bit 3 

Film-Drive Speed Bit 2 and SRC Bit 2 

Film-Drive Speed Bit 1 (MSB) and SRC 

Bit 1 (MSB) 

Interlocks: 

Comments: 

(1) No film motion will occur unless 9 OP ON or 5 OP ON 

is provided for that system in which film drive is 

commanded. The stereo mirror position will be stored, 

however, and the SRC will function for the commanded 

system. 

(2) The 9/5 TAKE-UP INHIBIT will be overridden in a system 

if a low-tension condition is encountered or if the 

take-up side of a storage looper reaches electrically 

full. The 9/5 TAKE-UP INHIBIT will also be overridden 

by execution of a 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE command after 

execution of the 14V WORD. 

(1) The film drive requires 0.30 second (nominal) after the 

command reaches the PPS/DP EAC to achieve acceptable 

drive smoothness. During this time, the SRC mechanism 

can move four steps. If a change of more than four 

steps in the SRC is required, it should be accomplished 

before the film motion begins or focus degradation will 

occur as the SRC is moving. This can be accomplished 

by leaving the operational power for a system OFF and 

requesting film drive for that system with a 14V WORD 

command. Another 14V WORD or 13V WORD command must 

then be used to request film drive OFF after the SRC 

move has been completed. 

(2) The 14V WORD is the only command which can be used to 

provide the stereo mirror position information to the 

PPS/DP EAC. 

(3) The 14V WORD is the only command which can be used to 

commence photography in either system. 

TO~ G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY Et-1 AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

2.7.4.5 9/5 Camera Off (13V WORD) 

13V WORD (13V2bWXYZ, bits 27-31, Implicit) 

Function: 

(1) This command implicitly terminates photography in 

both the 9 and the 5 systems by resetting the 9 

and 5 film-drive command memories to OFF. It 

also removes power from the 9 and 5 SRCs, and the 

9 and 5 data tracks and interframe markers. 

(2) The stereo servo will move to the position stored 

by the last 14V WORD command and the crab servo 

will move to the crab angle specified. Bits 27-30 

of the 13V WORD command specify the crab angle to 

be executed. Bit 31 provides the polarity of the 

desired crab angle. 

Bit No. 

Implicit 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 } through 

38 

Bit: 

l3V WORD Command Bits 

Function 

9 and 5 Film Drive OFF 

9 and 5 SRCs OFF 

9 and 5 Data Track and Interframe Markers OFF 

Stereo Mirror Drive ON 

No Function in PPS/DP EAC 

Crab Angle (LSB) 

Crab Angle 

Crab Angle 

Crab Angle (MSB) 

Crab Polarity 

No Function in PPS/DP EAC 

For crab angle vs command-bit pattern, refer to 

Table 3.4-2 in Part 3, Section 4. 

3.2-166 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Interlocks: 

Comments: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

(1) This command requires either 9 OP ON or 5 OP ON for 

execution of crab and stereo positions. 

(2) The stereo mirror stereo angle position given in 

the last 14V WORD will be executed by this command. 

(1) 3.0 seconds are required for stereo angle transitions between extremes (forward/aft), 2.0 seconds 

between adjacent positions (aft/vertical or forward/vertical). 

(2) Crab angle transition requires 3.0 seconds for one 

step. Each additional step requires 2.5 seconds. 

(3) Due to system design, it is possible to more accurately achieve a desired crab angle by approaching 

the desired crab step from a certain direction 

(reference Part 3, Section 4). 

(4) The 13V WORD is the only command which executes 

crab and stereo mirror changes. 

2.7.4.6 9/5 RUNOUT ON Command (MCS) 

(MP00046) 

Function: This command provides power to the: 

Stereo Servo 

Crab Servo 

9 FPLLE 

Film Control Electronics 

5 FPLLE 

Film Handling Electronics 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System On I y 
Interlocks: 

Comment: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008-_ W-C-019840-RI-80 

It selects the normal speed range of film-drive speeds 

and selects 11 1" for the two most significant film-drive 

speed bits. It turns ON the 9 and the 5 FPLLEs producing film drive in both systems between step 768 

(9.70 in./sec) and step 1023 (11.8 in./sec). 

(1) Runout can be halted by commanding 9 OFF (MN00122) 

and 5 OFF (MN00124) or 9/5 OFF (MN00773). 

(2) Runout can also be negated by the ECS 13V WORD or 

14V WORD commands together with 9 OP OFF and 5 

OP OFF. 

(3) Application of power to the film handling electronics (5 operational power) disables the 5 

parking brake circuitry. Removing 5 OP will remove the disable if the 5 parking brake power 

is OFF. Otherwise:;- the disable will not be removed until both 5 OP and 5 parking brake power 

are OFF. 

The 9/5 RUNOlIT ON command does not enable the SRC, 

data track, and interframe marker circuitry. 

2.7.4.7 POWER OFF Commands (MCS) 

9 OFF (MN00122) 

5 OFF (MN00124) 

9/5 OFF (MN00773) 

Function: These commands remove power from the: 

Stereo Servo (9 OFF and 5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

Crab Servo (9 OFF and 5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

Focus Sensor Electronics (9 OFF, 5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

9 FPLLE (9 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

5 FPLLE (5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

3.2-168 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Han d l e v i a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Film Control Electronics (9 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

Film Handling Electronics (5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

Sl-PRG (9 OFF, 5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

Interlocks: Removing power from the film handling electronics (5 

OP) enables the 5 parking brake circuitry, if the 

5 parking brake power is OFF. Otherwise, the disable 

will not be removed until both 5 OP and 5 parking 

brake power are OFF. 

2.7.5 Take-up Control Commands 

2.7.5.1 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE Command 

(N02653, N01653, N03653) 

Function: 

Interlocks: 

This command allows both the film control electronics 

(9) and the film handling electronics (5) to transfer 

film from the take-up sides of the associated loopers 

to the take-ups and to refill the supply sides of the 

loopers from the supply spools. The transfer will 

only take place on a looper whose supply side is not 

electrically full of unexposed film. The take-up 

will again be inhibited when its looper is filled, or 

if any 14V WORD command is executed while the supply 

looper is filling. 

If the supply side of a looper is in the electrically 

full state when 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE is commanded, the 

take-up associated with that looper will remain 

inhibited. 

(1) 9 OP ON and 5 OP ON are required until completion 

of a take-up operation in the indicated camera 

system. 

(2) Each time a 14V WORD is executed, both the 9 and 

the 5 take-ups will be inhibited until a 9/5 

TAKE-UP ENABLE command is executed. (The inhibit 

will be overridden in one camera system if the 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System On I y 
Comments: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008-_ W-C-019840-RI-80 

film tension is low, or if the take-up side of a 

looper reaches electrically full:) 

(3) In long strip activity, only the first 9/5 TAKE-UP 

ENABLE command following a 14V command will be 

effective; a 14V TAKE-UP INHIBIT is required between 

consecutive 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE commands. 

(1) A take-up cycle requires a maximum of 3.0 seconds 

to completely fill the supply side of the looper 

from the electrically empty state with the film 

drive not operating (3.5 seconds for the 9 system 

when there is less than 500 feet or more than 

4000 feet of film on the spool, and the drive 

voltage is less than 24.5 vdc). 

(2) If a 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE is not received before the 

take-up side of a looper reaches electrically full, 

the take-up associated with that looper will activate, emptying only that looper. Such a sequence 

may degrade high-resolution photography. 

2.7.5.2 Splice and Cut Commands 

9 SPLICE AND CUT (P02766, P01766, P03766) 

5 SPLICE AND CUT (P02573, P01573, P03573) 

Function: These commands fire the pyros which initiate the respective splicer mechanisms. They cut the film going 

into SRV 1 and splice the film coming from the loopers 

to the leaders going to SRV 2. They also connect the 

respective take-up control signals to SRV 2. 

Interlocks: The commands enable 9 ROLL-IN TERMINATE and 5 ROLL-IN 

TERMINATE. 

Constraints: The film must be stationary for execution of these 

commands. Tension should be removed from the splice 

shortly after command execution (typically within 

10 minutes). 

3.2-170 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Han d 1 e v i a BY Et-.1 AN 

Cont ro I Sys tern On I y 
Comments: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

After execution of the first SPLICE AND CUT, the loose 

tail of the film must be rolled into SRV 1 before any 

film is moved in the other system. The tail must also 

be rolled into SRV 1 prior to execution of the SPLICE 

AND CUT for the other system. These actions will prevent damage to either the 9 or 5 film strands in the 

tunnel where they move in close proximity to one 

another. 

Since the take-up control signals are connected to both 

SRV 1 and SRV 2 by this command, roll-in of the cut 

film ends into SRV 1 is accomplished as the take-ups 

are operated in SRV 2. 

2.7.5.3 Roll-in Terminate Commands 

9 ROLL-IN TERMINATE (N02652, N01652, N03652) 

5 ROLL-IN TERMINATE (N02752, N01752, N03752) 

Function: These commands remove the indicated take-up control 

signals from SRV 1. 

Interlocks: 9 SPLICE AND CUT enables 9 ROLL-IN TERMINATE, and 5 

SPLICE AND CUT enables 5 ROLL-IN TERMINATE. 

Comments: These commands are irreversible. 

The commands should not be given until the cut ends 

of film have been run into SRV 1 after 9 or 5 SPLICE 

AND CUT. This will prevent cutting off the last 

length of film when CUT AND SEAL 1 is given to prepare SRV 1 for recovery. The lengths of film to be 

rolled in are approximately 8,5 feet of 9.5-inch 

wide film and 11 feet of 5-inch wide film. 

2.7.5.4 Additional Commands Affecting Take-up Operation 

The following commands, described in the subsections referenced also control 

or affect take-up operation in addition to other functions: 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BI F-008- _W-C-019840-RI-80 

Command Subsection 

14V WORD (Film Drive ON/OFF) 

9/5 RUNOUT ON 

2.7.4.4 

2. 7.4.6 

2.7.4.7 

2.7.4.7 

2.7.4.7 

2. 7. 2. 2 

2.7.2.2 

9 OFF 

5 OFF 

9/5 OFF 

9 OP OFF 

5 OP OFF 

2.7.6 Variable Exposure Mechanism (Slit Mechanism) Commands 

2.7.6.1 Slit Select Commands 

9 SLIT A SELECT (Nl2035, Nll035, Nl3035) 

9 SLIT B SELECT (Nl2033, N11033, Nl3033) 

5 SLIT A SELECT (N12031, N11031, N13031) 

5 SLIT B SELECT (N12027, N11027, Nl3027) 

Function: 

Comments: 

These commands assign subsequent slit drive commands 

to two of the four slit control electronics circuits 

in the 9 and 5 camera electronics assemblies. 

Any combinations of Decoder A or B, CP CHANNEL A or 

B, 9 FPLLE A or B, 5 FPLLE A or B, 9 Slit A or B and 

5 Slit A or B may be used. There is no requirement 

to use all A's or all B's at the same time. 

2.7.6.2 9 Slit Command 

(4V0272bZ, 4V0172bZ, 4V0372bZ) 

Function: This command implicitly provides power to the 9 variable exposure mechanism control electronics (A or B) 

and moves the slit to the position indicated by bits 

35 to 38 of the command: 

3.2-172 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand! e vi a BY EM AN 

Control Sys tern On l y 
35 

(LSB) 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

Interlocks: 

Comments: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

---------··---··--··· 

Bit 

36 37 38 Slit No. Slit Width (Nominal) 

(MSB) Inches 

0 0 0 1 0.0040 

0 0 0 2 0.0054 

1 0 0 3 0. 0072 

1 0 0 4 0.0094 

0 1 0 5 0.0126 

0 1 0 6 0.0168 

1 1 0 7 0.0224 

1 1 0 8 0.0300 

0 0 1 9 0.0400 

0 0 1 10 0.0534 

1 0 1 11 0.0712 

1 0 1 12 0.0948 

0 1 1 13 0 .1266 

0 1 1 14 0 .1686 

1 1 1 15 0.2250 

1 1 1 16 0.3000 

(1) The execution of a 14V WORD command removes power 

from the 9 slit control electronics. 

(2) 9 OP ON is not required for execution of this 

command. 

1.0 second is required to attain the next wider or 

narrower slit. The execution of a 14V WORD will stop 

the variable exposure mechanism in transit if 

sufficient time has not been allowed for completion 

of the commanded move. The move can be continued 

while the camera is operating by giving the 4V command 

again. 

2.7.6.3 5 Slit Command 

(4V0262bZ, 4V0162bZ, 4V0362bZ) 

Function: This command implicitly provides power to the 5 variable exposure mechanism control electronics (A or B) 

and moves the variable mechanism to the position indicated by bits 35 to 38 of the command: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
35 

(LSB) 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

Interlocks: 

Comments: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BI F-008- _W-C-019840-RI-80 

Bit 

36 37 38 Slit No. Slit Width (nominal) 

(MSB) Inches 

0 0 0 1 0.0040 

0 0 0 2 0.0054 

1 0 0 3 0. 0072 

1 0 0 4 0.0094 

0 1 0 5 0.0126 

0 1 0 6 0.0168 

1 1 0 7 0.0224 

1 1 0 8 0.0300 

0 0 1 9 0.0400 

0 0 1 10 0.0534 

1 0 1 11 o. 0712 

1 0 1 12 0.0948 

0 1 1 13 0.1266 

0 1 1 14 0.1686 

1 1 1 15 0.2250 

1 1 1 16 0.3000 

(1) The execution of any 14V WORD command removes 

power from the 5 slit control electronics. 

(2) 5 OP ON is not required for execution of this 

command. 

1.0 second is required to attain the next wider or 

narrower slit. The execution of a 14V WORD will 

stop the variable exposure mechanism in transit if 

sufficient time has not been allowed for completion 

of the commanded move. The move can be continued 

while the camera is operating by giving the 4V 

command again. 

2.7.6.4 9/5 Slit Off (Implicit) 

Execution of any 14V WORD command (subsection 2.7.4.4) removes power from 

both the 9 and 5 variable exposure mechanism electronics. 

2.7.7 Slant Range Compensation Commands 

3.2-174 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand! e vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.7.7.1 SRC ON/OFF (14V WORD) 

(14V4bbWXYZ, bits 25-26, 35-38) 

Function: 

SRC 

Step No. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

*Note: (+) 

Refer to subsection 2.7.4.4 for the 14V WORD bit usage. 

Slant range compensation platen adjustments are determined by the four most significant film-drive speed 

bits. This SRC adjustment is implicit with the 14V 

WORD CAMERA ON command. Both 9 and the 5 systems have 

their own SRC electronics. Only that camera system 

being commanded will make an SRC adjustment. The SRC 

has 16 discrete positions over a 4.5-mil range. 

The nominal rate is four steps in 0.20 second. If more 

than four SRC steps are required prior to high-resolution photography, either the film drive may be turned 

ON early (using additional film), or the 14V WORD 

CAMERA ON word may be given while the operating power 

for that system is turned OFF (9 or 5 OP OFF). This 

will permit SRC adjustment without moving film. 

SRC step 10 corresponds to the nominal platen position. 

From step 10, the 

are as follows: 

Relative Platen 

Position (Mils)* 

+2.7 

+2.4 

+2.1 

+1. 8 

+1.5 

+1. 2 

+0.9 

+0.6 

+0.3 

Nominal Zero 

-0.3 

-0.6 

-0.9 

-1. 2 

-1. 5 

-1. 8 

is aft, toward the 

moves programmed by the SRC system 

Associated FDS 

Step No. 

0 through 63 

64 through 127 

128 through 191 

192 through 255 

256 through 319 

320 through 383 

384 through 447 

448 through 511 

512 through 575 

576 through 639 

640 through 703 

704 through 767 

768 through 831 

832 through 895 

896 through 959 

960 through 1023 

Ross Corrector 

G 

14V FDS Bits 

LSB-35 to MSB-38 

0000 

1000 

0100 

1100 

0010 

1010 

0110 

1110 

0001 

1001 

0101 

1101 

0011 

1011 

0111 

1111 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Interlocks: 9 SRC DISABLE and 5 SRC DISABLE commands prevent operation of the SRC drive and the data tracks and interframe 

markers in their respective systems. 9 SRC DISABLE is 

removed by commanding 9 OP ON; 5 SRC DISABLE is removed 

by commanding 5 OP ON. 

Comments: The SRC is designed to operate in the NORMAL SPEED 

RANGE. This fact must be accounted for when determining platen position during utilization of the 9/5 

FPLLE HIGH SPEED RANGE. 

2.7.7.2 9/5 SRC OFF (13V WORD) 

(13V2bWXYZ, bits 27-31, Implicit) 

Function: The 13V WORD implicit bit removes power from the 9 and 

5 SRC circuits, and the 9 and 5 data tracks and interframe markers. Additional functions of the 13V WORD 

(camera off) command can be found in subsection 

2.7.4.5. 

2.7.7.3 SRC Disable Commands 

9 SRC DISABLE (N02665, N01665, N03665) 

5 SRC DISABLE (N02654, N01654, N03654) 

Function: These commands prevent power application to the respective slant range compensation, data track and 

interframe marker electronics. 

Interlocks: An SRC DISABLE command is reset by an OP ON command 

in the same camera system; i.e., 

Comments: 

9 OP ON resets 9 SRC DISABLE 

5 OP ON resets 5 SRC DISABLE 

In addition to the loss of slant range compensation, 

data track and interframe marker information from the 

camera concerned will also be lost when an SRC DISABLE 

is used. 

3.2-176 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

--~--··----·--~--·-

2.7.7.4 SRC Disable Reset 

The operational power ON commands, 9 OP ON and 5 OP ON (subsection 2.7.2.1), 

reset the SRC DISABLE circuitry in the respective systems when executed. In 

so doing, the OP ON command also enables the data track and interframe marker 

circuitry in that system. 

2.7.8 Focus Adjustment (NPA) Commands 

2.7.8.l NPA Prime Mode Select Commands 

9 NPA PRIME MODE SELECT (Nl2017, Nll017, N13017) 

5 NPA PRIME MODE SELECT (Nl2015, N11015, Nl3015) 

Function: 

Comments: 

These commands choose the prime mode for execution of 

platen motion commands. The prime mode electronics 

can handle all nominal platen adjustment (NPA) commands, both NSPCs and RTCs. 

(1) The NPA mode (prime or backup) should be chosen 

prior to commanding 9 FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE or 5 

FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE. 

(2) The NPA prime mode may be used as a backup in 

the event of an SRC failure, although the NPA 

prime mode movement rate is considerably slower 

than the SRC. 

2.7.8.2 NPA Backup Mode Select Commands 

9 NPA BACKUP MODE SELECT (Nl2016, Nll016, Nl3016) 

5 NPA BACKUP MODE SELECT (Nl2022, Nll022, Nl3022) 

Function: These commands choose the backup mode for execution 

of platen motion commands. Only real time commands 

(RTCs) can be handled by the backup mode electronics. 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Han die vi a BY EM AN 

Con t ro l Sys tern On l y 
Comments: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008-_W-C-019840-RI-80 

The NPA mode (prime or backup) should be chosen or 

verified prior to commanding 9 FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE 

or S FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE. 

2.7.8.3 Focus Drive Enable Commands 

9 FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE (P02767, P01767, P03767) 

S FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE (P02564, P01564, P03564) 

Function: These commands provide power to the 9 and S focus 

drive electronics, both prime and backup, in the 

respective camera electronics assemblies. 

Interlocks: The 9 FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE command is required for 

execution of: 

Comments: 

9 PLATEN PLUS (Nl2023, Nl1023, Nl3023) 

9 PLATEN MINUS (N12025, Nll025, Nl3025) 

9 PLATEN STOP (Nl2026, Nll026, N13026) 

9 PLATEN PLUS (Rl2, Rll) 

9 PLATEN MINUS (R22, R21) 

The S FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE command is required for 

execution of: 

S PLATEN PLUS (Nl2020, Nll020, Nl3020) 

S PLATEN MINUS (Nl2021, Nl1021, Nl3021) 

S PLATEN STOP (Nl2024, Nl1024, Nl3024) 

S PLATEN PLUS (R02, ROl) 

S PLATEN MINUS (RS2, RSl) 

The mode (prime or backup) should be determined prior 

to enabling the drive. 

3.2-178 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 ------·--·-- ---

2.7.8.4 Focus Drive Inhibit Commands 

9 FOCUS DRIVE INHIBIT (Nl2030, Nll030, Nl3030) 

5 FOCUS DRIVE INHIBIT (Nl2032, Nll032, Nl3032) 

Function: These commands remove power from the 9 and 5 focus 

drive electronics respectively, both prime and 

backup. 

Interlocks: These commands prevent execution of any platen motion 

commands in the indicated systems. 

2.7.8.5 Platen Plus Commands 

9 PLATEN PLUS (Nl2023, Nll023, Nl3023) 

5 PLATEN PLUS (Nl2020, Nll020, Nl3020) 

Function: 

Interlocks: 

These commands initiate effective motion of the indicated film platen in the plus direction (positive 

reference: toward Ross Corrector). The movement is 

0.1 mil for each 0.2 second the command is in effect 

(0.5 mil/second). The commands can only be executed 

in the prime mode. 

(1) The 9 PLATEN PLUS command requires 9 NPA PRIME 

MODE SELECT and 9 FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE for execution. The 5 PLATEN PLUS command requires 5 NPA 

PRIME MODE SELECT and 5 FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE for 

execution. 

(2) Platen motion will continue until 9 PLATEN STOP 

or 5 PLATEN STOP are received. (9 FOCUS DRIVE 

INHIBIT and 5 FOCUS DRIVE INHIBIT will also stop 

the motion, but the motion will continue when 

the focus drives are again enabled.) PLATEN 

STOP must follow a PLATEN PLUS before motion 

can be initiated in the opposite direction. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

ttandl e vi a BY EM AN 

Cont ro I Sys tern On I y 
Comments: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-SO 

A platen is not protected from being driven to mechanical stops on either end of its 24-mil range. No 

catastrophic damage would result from such action. 

2.7.8.6 Platen Minus Commands 

9 PLATEN MINUS (Nl2025, Nll025, Nl3025) 

5 PLATEN MINUS (Nl2021, Nll021, Nl3021) 

Function: 

Interlocks: 

Comments: 

These commands initiate effective motion of the indicated film platen in the minus direction (away from 

the Ross Corrector). The movement is 0.1 mil for each 

0.2 second the command is in effect (0.5 mil/second). 

The commands can only be executed in the prime mode. 

(1) The 9 PLATEN MINUS command requires 9 NPA PRIME 

MODE SELECT and 9 FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE for execution. The 5 PLATEN MINUS command requires 5 NPA 

PRIME MODE SELECT and 5 FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE for 

execution. 

(2) Platen motion will continue until 9 PLATEN STOP 

or 5 PLATEN STOP are received. (9 FOCUS DRIVE 

INHIBIT or 5 FOCUS DRIVE INHIBIT will also stop 

the motion, but the motion will be continued 

when the focus drives are once again enabled.) 

PLATEN STOP must follow a PLATEN MINUS before 

motion can be initiated in the opposite direction. 

A platen is not protected from being driven to mechanical stops on either end of its 24-mil range. No 

catastrophic damage would result from such action. 

3.2-180 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

2.7.8.7 Platen Stop Commands 

9 PLATEN STOP (Nl2026, Nll026, Nl3026) 

5 PLATEN STOP (N12024, Nll024, Nl3024) 

Function: 

Comments: 

(1) These commands terminate motion of the 9 and 5 

film platens. 

(2) The commands stop the platen motion which was 

initiated by 9 PLATEN PLUS, 9 PLATEN MINUS, 5 

PLATEN PLUS, or 5 PLATEN MINUS commands in the 

prime mode. 

The PLATEN STOP commands will reset the real time command receipt relays in the command processor, if set 

by an RTC. Execution of PLATEN STOP must follow a 

platen direction command before motion can begin in 

the opposite direction. However, the PLATEN STOP 

command should not be given when using RTC commands 

until all RTCs,have been executed. 

2.7.8.8 Platen Plus Commands (RTC) 

9 PLATEN PLUS (R12, Rll) 

5 PLATEN PLUS (R02, ROl) 

Function: These commands initiate effective incremental motion 

of the indicated film planes in the plus direction 

(toward the Ross Corrector). Platen motion will 

continue as long as PLATEN PLUS command pulses are 

received. In the prime mode, each real time command 

will cause a 0.1 mil movement. In the backup mode, 

each real time command will move the platen 0.025 mil. 

Backup mode commands must be sent in groups of four, 

resulting in an adjust rate of one 0.1 mil step in 

0.8 second (four command pulses). 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control Sys tern On I y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008-_~-C-019840-RI-80 

Interlocks: The conunands require 9 FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE or 5 FOCUS 

DRIVE ENABLE for execution. They can be executed by 

either the prime or backup mode electronics, but 

adjustment rates are different in each mode. PLATEN 

STOP must follow a PLATEN PLUS before motion can be 

initiated in the opposite direction. 

Comments: A platen is not protected from being driven to mechanical stops on either end of its 24-mil range. No 

catastrophic damage will result from such action. 

Although each RTC pulse in the backup mode moves the 

platen 0.025 mil, ambiguous positioning can result 

if commands are given in other than multiples of four. 

2.7.8.9 Platen Minus Conunands (RTC) 

9 PLATEN MINUS (R22, R21) 

5 PLATEN MINUS (R52, R51) 

Function: These commands initiate effective incremental motion 

of the indicated film planes in the minus direction 

(away from the Ross Corrector). Platen motion will 

continue as long as PLATEN MINUS command pulses are 

received. In the prime mode, each real time conunand 

will cause a 0.1 mil movement. In the backup mode, 

each real time conunand will move the platen 0.025 

mil. Backup mode conunands should be sent in groups 

of four, resulting in an adjust rate of 0.1 mil in 

0.8 second (four conunand pulses). 

Interlocks: The conunands require 9 FOCUS DRIVE ENABLE or 5 FOCUS 

DRIVE ENABLE for execution. They can be executed by 

either the prime or backup mode electronics, but 

adjustment rates are different in each mode. PLATEN 

STOP must follow a PLATEN MINUS before motion can be 

initiated in the opposite direction. 

Conunents: A platen is not protected from being driven to mechanical stops on either end of its 24-mil range. No 

catastrophic damage will result from such action. 

Although each RTC pulse in the backup mode moves the 

platen 0.025 mil, ambiguous positioning can result if 

conunands are given in other than multiples of four. 

3.2-182 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

-----------------

3.0 OPTICAL SUBSYSTEM 

The PPS/DP EAC optical subsystem incorporates a lens (designated R-5) and a 

movable folding mirror (the stereo mirror) to produce a highly corrected 

image of a distant moving scene. The R-5 lens uses an aspheric mirror as 

the primary converging element and uses a set of five smaller refractive 

elements (the Ross corrector and field lens assembly (RCFLA)) to provide 

optical correction over an extended field. The stereo mirror is an elliptical shaped, reflecting element which is used to redirect the optical 

line-of-sight (LOS); it has no optical function other than redirection of 

the input light rays. 

Additional optical elements are mounted in the dual platen camera housing 

but are not considered components of the optical subsystem. They include 

the stationary (5 folding) mirror (Part 3, Section 2) and the focus sensor 

assembly optics (Part 3, Section 6). 

3.1 Optical Subsystem Configuration 

1ne basic configuration of the lens and stereo mirror is illustrated in 

Figure 3.3-1. The folding mirror associated with the 5 film platen is 

included for reference purposes only. 

The R-5 lens has a 175-inch effective focal length* with a nominal f/4.02 

relative aperture. The telephoto ratio, which is the ratio of the overall 

length to the focal length, is 1.085. The back focal length, or the distance 

*Due to the optical characteristics of the RCFLA, the effective focal length 

is considerably shorter than the physical length of the optical subsystem. 

_G_ 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control Sys tern On l y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BI F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

This page intentionally left blank. 

3.3-2 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

tn 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

i "Y" dia _j 

I I 

I 

~ Ross Corrector Lenses 

(Clear aperture dimensions are given in Table 3.3-1.) 

105.520 

0.176 S Image Plane 

9 Image 

Plane 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

__,.. -- -- __..:::::---=---===-

--- r: Lon< Ne. S /{Lens No. 4 

___ ..---

Lens No. 1 --- ;,--- T . j"' --~-~-+-- --------- ------------------------------------ n+- Tl "Y" lerture 

---------------- ----- 1/ -....._ - -

- SI +Z View 

21.6477----,.--

RCFLA 

Thickness (Tl-6) and Spacing (Sl-6) dimensions are given in Table 3.3-1. 

--- --

______________ .....---------- --==-

AP~--­

--'-

Stereo Mirror Pivot Oat a S Folding Mirror 

~/f//A.r --r--------- ~ § I --------

Handle via BYEMAll Control Systen Only 

,,,, , I - -------+---------·---- ---------.. 

Stereo Mirror ! -Y View 

Figure 3.3-1. Optical Configuration of the R-5 Lens and Stereo Mirror 

3.3-3/3.3-4 

I'Tia ary Mirror 

(Curvature Exaggerated) 

~-G-

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

tn 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 --------

from the -X surface of the number 5 Ross lens to the focal plane is 5.756 

inches (infinity conjugate). Table 3.3-1 summarizes the R-5 lens formula 

characteristics. Refractive indices of the lens materials used are listed 

in Table 3.3-2. 

3.2 Elements of the Optical Subsystem 

To illustrate the contribution of each component of the optical subsystem, 

the characteristics and functions of the primary and stereo mirrors and of 

the RCFLA are treated individually in the following sections. A summary of 

the physical characteristics of the optical subsystem is presented in 

Table 3.3-3. The optical properties of the subsystem are summarized in 

Table 3.3-4. 

3. 2. 1 Stereo Mirror 

The stereo mirror is a flat, ultra-low-expansion (ULE), silica element with 

a highly reflective front surface coating of silver and lanthanum oxide. 

Because of its size, a honeycomb type of construction is used to save weight. 

The mirror is a movable optical element which has two degrees of freedom 

(crab and stereo), and provides the ability to redirect the line-of-sight 

(LOS) at approximate right angles to the lens axis. Movement in crab is 

used to align the image and film velocity vectors. Stereo movement provides 

the ability to acquire a stereoscopic image of a scene. 

The mirror is suspended by lateral axles in spherical bushings so that bending stresses cannot be introduced into the mirror through the suspension. 

The axles (trunnions) are fixed to pillow blocks attached to a magnesium 

yoke as described in Part 3, Section 1. The crab servo, mounted on the aft 

face of the COA double bulkhead, is connected to the yoke by a lead screw 

and nut. Travel of the nut (which is attached to the yoke) causes the yoke 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand I e v1 a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
TAP SfCDET G 

,---

Element 

.A.sphere 

Lens 1 

)> 

"O Lens 2 "O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. Lens 3 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD Lens 4 Q) (.N 

CJ) 

CD (.N 

I I\) (J\ 0 

...... Lens S 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

Hand! e vi a BY EM AN 

SysteTI On 

Surface* Radius 

1 383. 7910(1) 

2 -188.4970 

3 +65.9500 

4 -15.8105 

s +203.6580 

6 +141.6670 

7 -13.0786 

8 +21.5360 

9 66.9137 

10 -31.1467 

11 +19. 6411 

Image -

TABLE 3.3-1 

R-5 OPTICAL FOR,1\1ULA 

Clear Aperture 

Y Dia Z Dia 

43.50 -

14.92 6. 72 

14.86 6.60 

14.07 6.48 

13.95 5.99 

13.91 S.94 

12.69 s. 72 

10.33 3.02 

10.46 2.99 

10.57 2.99 

10.58 2.91 

-

*As defined on Figure 3.3-1. 

**Glass types are Schott designations 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Center* 

I 

Glass** Center* 

Type Thickness Spacing 

I - - 162.4660(Sl) 

SK-14 1.0S69(Tl) 

0. 0718 (S2) 

SK-14 1.9694(T2) 

0.087S(S3) 

LaKN-14 0.4400(T3) 

16.0660(S4) 

LaKN-14 0.4229(T4) 

0.1261(SS) 

SK-14 1. 4071 (TS) 

- - S.7560(S6) 

(1) Aspheric Surface Sag cs2 + 1.872098 x 10-13 s6 ~~~~~~~~~ 

1 + Jl-(1-E2)c2 s

2 

where c 1 

= Radius 

s = Distance From Vertex 

E2 = 1. 857249 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

TABLE 3.3-2 

R-5 REFRACTIVE INDICES 

Schott Glass Type 

Wavelength (nm) SK-14 

486.1 1.610029 

516.7 1.607513 

546.1 1.605482 

587.6 1.603108 

623.4 1. 601412 

656.3 1.600073 

686.9 1. 598978 

Note: Glass indices are Schott catalog values. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

LaKN-14 

1.705546 

1. 702362 

1.699796 

1. 696797 

1.694656 

1. 692966 

1.691584 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.3-3 

OPTICAL SYSTEM PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS SUMMARY 

Overall Length 

Asphere to Ross Length 

Back Focal Length 

Aperture Diameter (nominal) 

Measured Weight 

Ross Corrector and Field Lens Assembly 

Primary Mirror Assembly 

Stereo Mirror (including mounts) 

Stereo Yoke Mechanism 

Internal Structure (tube + box beams) 

Total 

Stereo Mirror 

External Shape 

Central Hole 

189.9 inches 

162.466 inches 

5.756 inches 

43.5 inches 

96 pounds 

347 pounds 

456 pounds 

44 pounds 

473 pounds 

1416 pounds 

Elliptical, 58-inch major 

axis by 46-inch minor axis 

Rectangular, 17.0 inches 

long by 9.8 inches wide 

G Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Cont ro I Sys tern On I y 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

--------------~------···-

TABLE 3.3-4 

OPTICAL PROPERTIES SUMMARY 

Effective Focal Length 

Aperture Diameter (primary mirror) 

£-number* 

Type 

Configuration 

Semi-field Angle 

Percent Obstruction* 

(central and edge) 

Clear Aperture Transmittance 

Typical T-numbers* 

Stereo Angle of Line-of-Sight 

(with respect to nadir) 

Depth of Focus* 

Crab-angle Range 

Optical Quality Factor* 

Peak Static Resolution* 

175 inches 

43.5 inches 

4.02 nominal 

4.46 effective - forward 

4.30 effective - nadir 

4.22 effective - aft 

Aspheric reflector with fiveelement Ross corrector 

Optical path folded by stereo 

mirror; optical axis passes 

through stereo mirror 

1.45 degrees - 9 subsystem 

0.74 degree - 5 subsystem 

12. 4 (nadir) 

84 percent 

5. 0 (forward) 

4. 8 (nadir) 

4. 7 (aft) 

-8.65, 0, +8.65 degrees 

±0.00072 inch 

(Rayleigh criterion) 

-3.85 to +3.85 degrees 

85 percent (minimum) 

ines/mm (geometric mean)** 

*Values are quoted with respect to the 9 subsystem image plane. Values 

at the 5 subsystem image plane differ slightly. 

**Based on 2:1 contrast at film plane, 85 percent OQF; 

threshold modulation= 0.017 + 3.7 x 10-~v. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle v1 a BY EM AN 

Control System On\ y 

25X1 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BI F-008- _W-c-g_l9840-RI-80 

to rotate about the crab axis for crab adjustment over a nominal range of ±3.85 

degrees. This rotation of the stereo mirror relative to the film platen axis 

produces a rotation of the image velocity vector and a deviation of the lineof-sight in the cross-track direction. (See Fi-gures 1. 2-7 and 1. 2-8 in Part 1, 

Section 2 of this document for illustrations of crab movements.) 

Rotation of the mirror in stereo is accomplished by a servo motor attached to 

the mirror yoke and linked to the mirror through a hypocycloid mechanism. This 

drive provides shockless, precise positioning of the mirror at three discrete 

positions: nadir, forward, and aft. At zero crab angle, a +4.325-degree rotation about the stereo axis causes a +8.65-degree change in the line-of-sight 

with the result that the LOS is forward of the vehicle relative to nadir. For 

a -4.325-degree rotation the LOS is aft by 8.65 degrees relative to nadir. 

For a more detailed discussion of the crab and stereo mirror drives, refer to 

Part 3, Section 4. 

3.2.2 Primary Mirror (Asphere) 

The primary mirror is an aspheric converging element which accepts the light 

rays directed from the stereo mirror and reflects (and converges) them toward 

the Ross corrector. The mirror, which is 44.5 inches in diameter, is constructed of ultra-low-expansion, fused silica using a lightweight cellular core. 

A high reflectance front surface coating applied over a 43.5-inch diameter 

area defines the clear aperture of the PPS/DP EAC optical subsystem, and, based on 

a 175-inch effective focal length, results in the nominal R-5 lens f-number of 

4.02. The aspheric shape of the mirror provides almost perfect correction to 

minimize aberrations at the edge of the field. 

The mounting of the primary mirror is designed to provide strain-free support 

and thermal isolation. The mirror is potted to three mounts which in turn are 

supported in the end bell (aft end of the internal structure) by a threepoint suspension called the flexure assembly (refer to Part 3, Section 1). 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control Sys tern On l y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

3.2.3 Ross Corrector and Field Lens Assembly 

The primary function of the RCFLA is the correction of field curvature arising from the aspheric primary mirror. However, introduction of the refractive 

Ross corrector elements produces chromatic aberration. As a result, the 

design and execution of the RCFLA in combination with the asphere are critical 

if acceptable levels of aberration are to be realized. 

Each of the surfaces of the five RCFLA elements has an antireflection coating to reduce transmission losses. In addition, the Ross surface nearest the 

focal plane is coated with a minus blue filter that establishes a lower spectral transmittance figure of approximately 30 percent at 435 nanometers and, 

in conjunction with the film types used in the PPS/DP EAC results in an overall 

spectral range of approximately 435 to 720 nanometers. 

A portion of the RCFLA protrudes into a hole in the stereo mirror. This 

position was deemed best considering the design trade-offs involved. The 

RCFLA housing is attached to the internal structure by a supporting framework forward of the double bulkhead and a double K-pad arrangement on the aft 

side of the double bulkhead. Within the housing, the two field lens elements 

are separated from the three-element corrector group by a 16-inch air space. 

3.3 Optical Performance Parameters 

The determination of the expected performance of the optical subsystem is 

directly affected by the limitations of the physical hardware. Factors such 

as surface irregularities, lens color, material inhomogeneity, and manufacturing tolerances in mounting and alignment directly affect the quality of the 

overall subsystem. Detailed analysis of the influence of these factors on 

optical quality is presented in Part 2, Section 12, with a discussion of such 

quality evaluation and performance prediction techniques as optical quality 

factor (OQF) calculations and modulation transfer function (MTF) analysis. 

The magnitude of thermally induced focus changes is also evaluated in Part 2, 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control Sys tern On I y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

TO~ 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

-------·---------

Section 12, with the shift due to each individual COA component, and the resultant shift due to all contributors summarized graphically. Other significant factors, specifically vignetting and spectral transmittance, are addressed in the following subsections. 

3.3.1 Aperture Obstructions and Vignetting 

Figure 3,3-2 is a view of the Ross corrector looking forward from the primary 

mirror. The effective opening in the stereo mirror defines the central obstruction, and also introduces a small amount of edge vignetting for the extreme stereo/crab position shown. The circles represent the unvignetted cross 

sections and the ellipses represent the vignetted cross sections of the beam 

at the front surface of the Ross corrector.* Note that all vignetting indicated by the shaded areas is caused by the stereo mirror. 

The vignetting of the central and S-1 sensor obstructions is shown in the clear 

aperture view of Figure 3.3-3. 

Vignetting by the stereo mirror causes the effective £-number (and T-number) 

to vary with stereo position (forward, nadir, or aft). Table 3.3-5 summarizes the vignetting as a percentage of the unvignetted aperture for several 

stereo mirror positions at the on-axis and extreme off-axis field positions. 

The worst-case, off-axis vignetting due to the stereo mirror is 24.9 percent 

and occurs in the forward position at a crab angle of 3.85 degrees. The relative illumination at the edge of the field is 84 to 89 percent, depending on 

the crab angle of the stereo mirror. (Note: Effective vignetting values at 

the 9 and 5 image planes will differ slightly.) 

*Vignetting due to a malfunction in the viewport door subsystem is discussed 

in Part 3, Section 5. 

3.3-12 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD (.N 

I\) . 

(.N 0 

...... I 

-J ,.... 

(.N --

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECREI G 

Effective Opening 

In Stereo 

[> 

I 

rt. ~ 

40° 40 I 30" ' 

Forward Stereo Position 

13.85°1 Maximum Crab Angle 

Hand! e vi a BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

-Y View 

Lens Outl 

(BIF-008 Vehicle Coordinates) 

Figure 3.3-2. Stereo Mirror Vignetting 

e 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Clear Aperture 

(3 Field Positions) 

Stereo Projection 

(3 Field Positions) 

-X View 

TOP SECRET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
TOP SECR~T .JL_ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) vi +Y CJ) . CD vi .. I I\) 

0 """"' .j:>. ...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

Hand I e vi a BYEMAN 

System On 

Central 

Obstruction 

+Z 

I 

-Z 

S-1 Rod 

Sensor 

Outrigger 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

perture 

-Y 

Note: Coordinates shown 

are BIF-008 vehicle 

coordinates. 

Figure 3.3-3. Central And S-1 Sensor Vignetting 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

--------

TABLE 3.3-5 

PERCENT OBSTRUCTION (Vignetting) 

Stereo Mirror Off Axis* Central S-1 Sensor 

Position On Axis* 00 Crab 3.85° Crab Obstruction Obstruction 

Forward 10.8 21.6 24.9 7.7 2.9 

Nadir 4.0 15.5 18.9 8.4 2.8 

Aft () 11. 7 16.l 9.0 2.7 

*Central and S-1 sensor obstructions not included. 

3.3.2 Lens Spectral Transmittance 

The transmittance characteristic of a lens is best defined by its spectral 

transmittance, or transmitted energy plotted as a function of wavelength. 

In practice, the spectral transmittance of each optical assembly is obtained 

from a calculation based on spectral transmittance and reflectance data for 

the individual components. Transmittance values for the optical path length 

in glass (LaKN-14 and SK-14) are taken from the vendor's catalog. Transmittance values for the nine low reflectance multilayer coatings and the 

minus-blue cut-off filter are measured and supplied by the coating contractor. 

Reflectance values for the stereo and primary mirrors are also measured values. 

Figure 3.3-4 is a typical resultant curve. 

3.4 Instrumentation 

Table 3.3-6 is a list of the instrumentation specifically applicable to the 

optical subsystem. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand 1 e vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

:re, SECRET 

1. 0 

IJ.I 

. 

IJ.I 

I 

...... 

0\ 

0.9 

0.8 

0.7 

B o.6 

§ 

+-' 

+-' 

·~ o. 5 VI 

~ !-I 

E--< 0.4 

0.3 

0.2 

0.1 

0.0 

G 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

0.42 0.44 0.46 0.48 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.72 

Handle via BYEMAN 

System Onl 

Wavelength (Micrometers) 

Figure 3.3-4. Typical Spectral Transmittance, RS Optics 

(Unobstructed) 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

I ul9 SECREJ _§_ Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.3-6 

OPTICAL SUBSYSTEM INSTRUMENTATION 

IMP 

--

5099 

5110 

VI 

(j-1 

I 

....... 

-J 5112 

5113 

5115 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System On 1 y 

Title 

Temperature, Stereo 

Mirror 

, Corrector, 

Lens Tube 

Forward, 175' 279 

Temperature, Lens Tube 

Aft, Sta 244, 5 Degrees 

Temperature, Lens Tube 

Forward, Sta 175, 99 

Degrees 

A thermistor, mounted on the back surface 

of the stereo mirror, monitors the mirror 

temperature. The output is processed by 

an integrated circuit differential amplifier the instrumentation processor, 

producing a 1 signal from 60F (4.75v) 

to 80F (l.06v). 

Similar to IMP 5099; is 

mounted on Ross 

Corrector at the +Y approximately 

2 3/4 the camera . 

A thermistor located on the outer 

of the COA structure at Sta 175, 279 degrees, monitors the internal structure 

temperature. The output in 

the instrumentation processor, producing 

a nonlinear signal from 40F (4.95v) to 

lOOF (l.4v). 

Similar to IMP 5099, the thermistor is 

mounted on the outer surf ace of the COA 

at Sta 244, 5 degrees. 

Similar to IMP 5099, the thermistor is 

mounted on the outer surf ace of the COA 

at Sta 175, 99 degrees. 

Power 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

+15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

TOP SECRET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

LOP SiCAEf- .....JJ.... 

(>l 

. 

(>l 

I 

I-" 

00 

IMP 

5145 

5150 

5375 

5009 

5010 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

Title 

Temperature Primary 

Mirror 2 (-Y) 

Temperature Primary 

Mirror 1 (+Y) 

Differential Temperature, Stereo Mirror 

Lower 

Crab Angle (Coarse) 

Crab Angle (Fine) 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Description 

A thermistor mounted on the front surface 

of the primary mirror, approximately 8 

inches from the center along the -Y axis, 

monitors the primary mirror surface temperature. The output is processed in the 

instrumentation processor producing a 

nonlinear signal from 40F (4.Sv) to lOOF 

(l.25v). 

Similar to IMP 5099) the thermistor is 

mounted on the front surf ace of the primary mirror. approximately 8 inches from 

the center) along the +Y axis. 

Two matched thermistors are mounted in the 

front and back plates of the stereo mirror. 

The two outputs are processed by a 

ential amplifier in the instrumentation 

processor producing a differential temperature signal, At (front minus back), 

ranging linearly from -I.OF (0.5v) to 

+3.0F (4.98v). 

A coarse and fine potentiometer (ratio 

5:1) with their associated voltage divider 

networks are located in the crab servo 

and are mechanically connected through 

gears to the servo output shaft. Voltage 

output extends linearly from 0.5v to 4.5v, 

with the fine sensor cycling several times 

over the full range of crab drive. 

Power 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

±15 vdc 

+5 vdc 

"'TO fl SEC:RFI _£_ 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

~TG 

(.N 

(.N 

l 

I-' 

(.!) 

IMP 

5148 

5149 

5127 

5147 

Handle via BYE.MAN 

C.Ontrol System Only 

Title 

Crab Angle (Coarse) 

Crab Angle 

Stereo Angle 

Stereo Angle 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Description 

A coarse and fine potentiometer (ratio 

5:1), located in that portion of the 

to the camera optics assembly, 

monitor directly the position of the 

stereo mirror yoke by means of lever arms 

and gears. This arrangement provides a 

means of monitoring crab position. Associated processing circuitry is 

located in this portion of the load box. 

A potentiometer, located within the stereo 

servo, monitors the position of the stereo 

shaft over the range of rotation 

to establish the three mirror 

The 

connected 

shaft. Out0. Sv to 4.Sv. 

A Potentiometer.located in that portion of 

to the stereo mirror 

monitors the stereo angle. Linkage 

arms connect the load box assembly to the 

stereo mirror and rotate the potentiometer 

as a function of mirror stereo position. 

is located in that 

box containing IMPs 

varies nonlinearly 

from O.Sv to 4.Sv (aft to forward). 

Power 

+15 vdc 

+5 vdc 

+15 vdc 

~-G-

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-OOS-W-C-019840-RI-80 

This page intentionally blank 

3.3-20 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

ttandlev1a BYrnAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008-W-C-019840-RI-80 

4. 0 MIRROR POSITIONING SUBSYSTEM 

Acquisition of high-resolution photography requires that the photographic payload 

section/dual platen extended altitude capability (PPS/DP EAC) have three angular 

degrees of freedom. One degree of freedom is provided by the roll joint in the 

satellite control section (SCS), which rotates the entire PPS/DP EAC about its 

roll axis. The remaining two degrees of freedom are provided within the PPS/DP 

EAC by the crab and stereo rotations of the stereo mirror. Crabbing the stereo 

mirror orients the image-motion vector in the image plane so that it will coincide 

with the direction of film motion, minimizing cross-track smear (reference Part 3, 

Section 2). Stereo aiming provides stereo convergence by allowing the line-ofsight to be moved fore and aft with respect to the satellite nadir. 

Figure 3.4-1 is a conceptual representation of the stereo-mirror yoke and its 

mount, showing the crab movement of the yoke and mirror, and the stereo movement 

of the mirror. Note that crabbing rotates the entire yoke, including the 

stereo Jnirror and stereo servo, such that the stereo mirror stereo axis lies 

wholly within a plane parallel to the Y-Z vehicle coordinate plane. 

All hardware associated with both servo systems is mounted forward of the stereo 

mirror in the controlled environment of the camera optics module (see Figure 

3.4.2).. Removable panels are provided to allow access to both servos or, if 

need be, removal and replacement of both from the completed PPS/DP EAC. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
yop ~ CCQCf G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) ~ 

CD 

.i:::. 

I\) I 

0 N ...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

Yoke Support Pad 

Handle via BYEMAH - System Onl 

Crab Servo 

~ Crab Axis 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Stereo Servo 

Yoke Support Pad 

,.....~Stereo Axis 

Hypocycloid Drive 

+Z 

+X 

BIF-008 Vehicle 

Coordinates 

Figure 3.4-1. Stereo Mirror Movements (Conceptual Presentation) 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

(.N 

_po. 

I 

(.N 

G 

"~.,.* ,~, 

'\,._ 

Note: Photograph is representative of FM-47 

configuration. FM-52 servos are identical. 

""-stereo 

Actuating Arm 

3,4-2. Crab and Stereo Servos 

Handle vi a BYEMAN 

Control System Only 

)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET G 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

4.1 Stereo Servo Subsystem 

The stereo servo provides the capability to reposition the line-of sight 

(LOS) deviating element (the stereo mirror) so that more than one "look" 

can be made at the same target during a single pass. In-track (stereo) 

aiming of the LOS is accomplished by rotating the stereo mirror to any of 

three positions (O degree, +4.325 degrees, or -4.325 degrees) about an axis 

which is parallel to the camera optics module pitch axis (Y-axis) when the 

crab angle is zero degree. The LOS, therefore, rotates either +8.65 (forward) 

or -8.65 degrees (aft) from the zero-degree position (zero degree is parallel 

to the Z-axis of the PPS/DP EAC). The mirror will consistently reproduce 

the zero-degree position within ±0.05 degree and the 8.65-degree stereo 

angles within ±0.15 degree. 

The stereo servo is capable of moving the mirror between extreme positions 

(forward/aft) and settling within three seconds after receiving a command, 

or within 2.0 seconds for transitions between adjacent positions (forward/ 

nadir or aft/nadir). The servo can neither overshoot nor hunt for its 

commanded position. Experience has shown that the mirror oscillates briefly about its final position, with the oscillation decaying as a damped 

sinusoid. The mirror is considered "settled" when the amplitude of oscillation falls below a specified limit. 

4 .1.1 Stereo Drive Components 

Stereo positioning of the mirror is accomplished by means of a servo motor 

mounted on the yoke which drives a hypocycloid mechanism connected to the 

mirror by a link (see Figure 3.4-3). The pressure-tight servo enclosure is 

fixed to the yoke by means of a mounting bracket such that rotation of the 

servo with respect to the yoke is prevented. Included in the enclosure is 

a de motor which drives the servo output shaft through a reduction gear 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
0 

00 

I 

H 

0:: 

I 

0 

..q00 

O'l 

.-I 

0 

I 

u 

I 

::::: I 

co 

0 

0 

I 

u... 

~1 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

3.4-5 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

<I.) 

> 

•ri 

H 

0 

"O 

@ 

0 

> H 

a.> 

[/) 

0 

<I.) 

H 

a.> 

.μ 

[/) 

~1 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80' 

train (270.4:1), thus providing the motor with a high torque advantage. Also 

mounted in the servo case are an encoder, and instrumentation potentiometers 

and associated circuitry. The hYPocycloid mechanism is attached to the servo 

mounting bracket, and a flexible coupling is used to ~onnect the output 

shaft of the servo to the input shaft of the hypocycloid. 

4.1.1.1 Hypocycloid Drive Assembly. The hypocycloid drive assembly (see 

Figures 3.4-4 and 3.4-5) is a three-position indexing drive based on the 

hYPocycloidal motion generated by a circle rotating inside another fixed 

circle. The pitch circle of a planet gear rotates on the pitch circle of 

a stationary internal gear. The gear teeth maintain the phase relation between input and output motions and also transfer forces. Because the ratio 

of the internal gear to the planet gear is 3:1, one revolution of the servo 

motor output shaft produces 3 revolutions of the planet gear and 3 cusps which 

are used as positioning points. 

A mirror position vs time plot is shown in Figure 3.4-6. The shape of this 

curve shows why the hypocycloid drive was selected for stereo mirror positioning. The mechanical advantage and resulting high acceleration or deceleration near the cusps (rest positions) bring the mirror to a controlled stop 

or start with a minimum of "ringing" (oscillation). Ringing is further 

minimized by the maintenance of extremely tight part tolerances throughout 

the linkage assembly. When the mirror is commanded from one extreme position 

to the other, the servo drive direction is such that the planet gear passes 

through the zero-position cusp; hence the path directly between plus and 

minus is not used. 

4 .1. 2 Stereo Servo Electronic Control 

Figure 3.4-7 is an electrical block diagram of the stereo servo subsystem and 

associated instrumentation. Power is provided by the power monitor and control (PM and C) primary power circuit via the servo power switch, with two 

3.4-6 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Rel ease: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

TOP G 

BIF-008- W-C-0198 40-RI-80 

~~~NET GE AR 

AFT 

) 

FORWAr1D 

Figure 3 4 . -4. Hypocycloid Dr· ive Assembly 

G 

-

Approved for R e I ease: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

H~ndle via BYEMAN 

ntrol Syst em Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP 5;1H"'.R~T G 

c,,.i 

. 

.(::>. 

I 

00 

Planet 

Gear 

""' 

Internal )'/ 

Gear _/ / ---

Servo Motor Shaft ~ 

(pinned to the 

lever which drives 

the planet gear.) 

Spherical Bearing 

Crank Arm 

of Bearing 

+Z 

BIF-008 

Vehicle Coordinates 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Mirror 

Pivot 

Figure 3.4-5. Hypocycloid Drive (Conceptual Representation) 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

- System 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

.. 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

Til"'\P Ci.S:FlilFT 

tN 

+:>-

I 

tD 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 

G 

,.-, 

Vl 

Q) 

Q) 

H 

OJ) 

Q) 

"cl 

'-' 

~ 

0 

...... 

.μ 

...... 

tf) 

0 

p.. 

H 

0 

H 

H 

.,...; 

:::;:: 

-4. 325 -

0.4 

Figure 3.4-6. 

0.8 

Time 

. . cal Pos 

Mirror With 

1.2 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

1.6 2,0 

econds) 

Curve For Stereo 

Drive 

2.4 

TOP SECRET G 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SiCAET .....G._ 

t.l'l 

. 

.i::. 

I 

....... 

0 

via 

System 

I COMMAND ~~ 

I PROCESS..Qfi* 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

11 CP-A 

jCP·B 

*SIMPLIFIED. FOR DETAIL ON CP STORE/ TRANSFER CIRCUIT, SEE 

PART 3,SECTION 9, 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

STEREv - -·-·~­

§J;!'!v-9 

.3502 BIT ONE COMMON 

1350; BIT rwo COMMON ---- - - --------r 

I 

I 

ENCODER 

I 

I 

I 

f!2!:!.I.B.Qk !!.!ii..!. 

Figure 3.4-7. 

1204 

24.5VOC (TO CRAB SERVO) 

RETU (~6' ~l.fl",~OP5090 i STEREO CRAB, STEREO AND DOOR CURRENT) I MIRROR 

Stereo Servo Subsystem Electrical 

Block Diagram 

s:1 

IMP 

5127 1605 I +5VIJC 

~~k I 

I 

I 

THE LOAD BOX OANGLE 

~ 

MENTATION 

IMP 5147 

1738 +15VDC 

INST. PWR. 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

- BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

5.0-ampere fuses, in parallel, between the switch and servo to protect 

against short circuits. The power switch is controlled by the 9 and 5 

operational power commands. The switch is closed (servo-drive powered) 

when either 9 OP ON or 5 OP ON is commanded. 

The stereo servo drive consists of a motor bidrive circuit, a mechanical 

brush-type encoder, a permanent magnet de motor, a time-out protection circuit, and two instrwnentation potentiometers geared to the output shaft. The 

servo is commanded to each of its 3 positions by means of a 2-bit binary 

code word. The positions are separated by 120 degrees of output shaft rotation. An increasing binary number results in a counterclockwise shaft 

rotation when viewed from the load end of the shaft. Three wires are connected between the servo and command processor for each bit. Position 

command information is supplied to the servo by shorting each bit-common 

lead to either the bit 11 111 or bit 11 011 lead by means of latching relays in 

the command processor. Stereo position commanding is controlled by bits 27 

and 28 of the 14V WORD command (see Table 3.4-1). Execution of a 14V WORD 

stores the position to which the stereo mirror is to move upon receipt of 

a 13V WORD command (9/5 Camera OFF). 

4 .1. 2 .1 Stereo Servo Motor Bi drive Circuit. The motor bid rive circuit is 

a s tandanl "IP' type drive with the motor in the center of the "H" and an 

NPN power Darlington transistor acting as a switch in each leg (reference 

Figure 3.4-7). The 2 top transistors in the bridge are self-biased on, 

but do not conduct until an emitter current path is provided by one of the 

bottom transistors. The direction of the motor current is determined by 

which of the lower power transistors is on. Information as to which bottom 

transistor is to be turned on is supplied by a voltage applied to one of 2 

lines from the encoder. One line goes to the base of a driver transistor on 

each bottom side of the "H". The driver circuit on each side of the bridge 

turns the bottom power transistor on and the top one off. When the servo is 

in a command-satisfied position, there is no voltage on either line and both 

3.4-11 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET ~ BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.4-1 

STEREO POSITION VS EXECUTED COMMAND BIT STATE 

(.;1 

. 

~ 

1 

N "'"" 

(3) 

14V WORD (l) 

Bit 27 Bit 28 

0 0 

0 1 

1 0 

l l 

Stereo Position (

2) 

($j:ereo Mirror 

+4.325 degrees 

o.oo degree 

-4.325 degrees 

-4. 

Notes: 

(1) 14V WORD Bit 27 corresponds to Stereo Bit 1 

14V WORD Bit 28 corresponds to Stereo Bit 2 

(2) Assuming execution of a 13V WORD command 

(3) Not normally used 

Handt e vi a BY EM AN ..-. System On -

Stereo Position (

2) 

(Line-Of-Sight) 

+8.65 degrees 

0.00 degree 

-8.65 degrees 

-8.65 

Descriptor 

(Convention) 

+ or Forward 

0 or Vertical 

- or Aft 

- or Aft 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008-_ W-C-019840-RI-80 

bottom transistors are off. If the mirror drive is mechanically moved such 

that the servo position falls outside the tolerance range for its commanded 

position, it will return to the commanded position without being recommanded, 

provided servo power is available. 

4.1.2.2 Stereo Servo Encoder. The function of the encoder is to compare the 

input binary command with actual shaft position and direct the bidrive circuit 

to run in the proper direction to satisfy the command. The encoder consists 

of 8 varying length, conductive segment tracks on a cylindrical drum. Electrical connection is made to each track by means of conductive brushes. This 

motor-encoder drive method is not a closed-loop system. Voltage is lost to 

the bidrive circuit when a command is satisfied by a brush breaking electrical 

contact with a segment. Coast is controlled by dynamic braking of the motor. 

4.1.2.3 Stereo Servo Overload Timer. If the servo does not reach its commanded position within 3.5 to 8.7 seconds, latching relay contacts in series 

with the 2 encoder outputs to the bidrive circuit open, disabling the servo. 

This time is determined by an RC timing circuit which triggers a transistor 

switch after the voltage on a capacitor reaches a predetermined level. If 

the timer has timed out before the commanded position is reached, the overload protection device must be reset manually by changing bit 28 of the 14V 

WORD command or by removing and reapplying servo power. Before recommanding 

the servo to a new position after it has satisfied a previous command, a 

0.5-second delay should be allowed for the timer to discharge; otherwise, any 

residual charge on the capacitor may result in the RC circuit reaching its 

trigger level in a shorter time than that needed to complete a normal mirror 

transition. 

4.1. 3 Stereo Angle Instrumentation 

Two lOKrl precision potentiometers are connected in parallel across the +5-volt 

instrumentation power line and geared to the output shaft (see Figure 3.4-8). 

3.4-13 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Hand! e v1 a BY EM AN 

Control Sys tern On l y 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD (.N Q) 

CJ) 

CD . 

.+>- .. 

I\) I 

0 ~ 

...... .+>- -J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET -L 

MIRROR DRIVE LiNKAGE 

POT R2,tMP 5127, STEREO 

POT Rl,NOCONNECT!ON 

ia BYEM 

System On 

SHOWN ARE SIF-008 VEHICLE COORDINATES 

,~DRIVE MOTOR 

YOKE 

Figure 3.4-8. Stereo and Servo 

BIF-006- W-C-019840-RI-80 

CRAB 

R21.1MP5009,CRA8 ANGLE (C04RSE) 

'--POT R20,JMP5010,CRAB ANGLE. (FINE) 

T 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0"1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

The wipers of both potentiometers are wired to the servo connector. The output of R2 is IMP 5127. The output of Rl is not wired into the system beyond 

the servo connector. Rl rotates five times for each rotation of R2 and is 

used solely for servo calibration. 

A second instrumentation point (IMP 5147) is also provided. This output is 

derived from a potentiometer located in an assembly (part of the load box) 

which is mounted to the yoke (reference Figure 3.4-9). Linkage arms connect 

the load box assembly to the stereo mirror and serve to rotate the potentiometer as a function of mirror stereo position. Power is provided by the 

+15-volt instrumentation supply. 

4.2 Crab Servo Subsystem 

Crab is defined as rotation of the stereo mirror stereo axis about an axis 

parallel to the vehicle roll axis (reference Figure 3.4-1). Crabbing of the 

stereo mirror is controlled by the crab servo which is capable of positioning the mirror to within 0.10 degree of each of 24 crab positions between 

+3,85 and -3.85 degrees in uniform 0.35-degree increments (+O.O degree and 

-0.0 degree are unique positions due to the mechanical encoder characteristics). In operation, the servo neither overshoots nor hunts for its commanded position. By choosing the direction of approach, it is possible to 

use the encoder deadband and motor deceleration characteristics to determine 

on which side of the nominal commanded position the mirror will actually stop. 

The magnitude. of this hysteresis around any given point is typically 0.10 

degree to 0.15 degree (excluding the zero-degree positions) and is essentially time-invariant for a given vehicle. The result is 46 unequally 

spaced, discrete crab positions which can be used to more accurately position the mirror in crab, if desired (see Figure 3.4-10). 

Under conditions of maximum load and low supply voltage, the crab servo can 

drive the yoke (and thereby the stereo mirror stereo axis) from one crab 

G -

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

luP SEEIUii _..G_ 

VI 

. 

.i::.. 

I 

...... 

Cl\ 

BYEM 

System On 

\STEREO 

\FROM NOMIN,\L) 

_\VAFT 

-Y~ 

{ ' FWD 

MIRROR 

Figure 3,4-9. 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

+Z 

.Af¥;LE 

Ll~·JKAGE TO MlfHWf~ NOT ~,HOWN 

AIR!, IMP5149, .ANGLE (FINE) 

AIR2, 1MP5148, CRAB ANGLE (COARSE) 

,./-x 

-Z 

'~ NOTE: AXFS c;HQWN ARE BIF-008 VEHICLE COORDINATES +Y 

Stereo Mirror Servos and Instrumentation 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
4 

3 

2 

~ 0 f+-4..++-.++++ 

b.O 

i:::: 

-< 

~ H 

u 

-1 

-2 

-10 -8 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

-4 

Crab Step Number 

Figure 3.4-10. Crab Hysteresis Effect 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008-_ W-C-019840-RI-80 

position to the next adjacent position (0.35 degree) and settle within three 

seconds after receiving a command. Each additional step moved requires 2.5 

seconds. In addition, under minimum load and maximum supply voltage, the 

maximum angular velocity of the servo output shaft does not exceed 125 degreesper-second. This requirement was established to limit the total angular 

momentum of the yoke-mirror combination to a level compatible with the SCS 

attitude-control system capability. 

4.2.1 Crab Drive Components 

The pressure-tight servo enclosure is fixed to an internal structure mounting 

frame by means of a mounting bracket (see Figure 3.4-11). The mount allows 

the servo to rotate about the crab axis, with respect to the internal structure, accommodating the yoke rotation. Included in the enclosure is a de 

motor driving the servo output shaft through a gear train having a speed reduction of 270.4:1, providing the motor with a high torque advantage. Also 

mounted in the servo case are an encoder, and the instrumentation potentiometers and associated circuitry. 

The output shaft of the servo drives the stereo mirror yoke by means of a 

lead screw and nut combination having a 0.1875-inch pitch per revolution. 

Beginning with Flight Model 50, the lead screw is protected from contamination by a dust cover composed of shields and a flexible bellows. The 

servo and ball screw are included in Figure 3.4-9. 

4.2.2 Crab Servo Electronic Control 

Figure 3.4-12 is an electrical block diagram of the crab servo subsystem 

and associated instrumentation. The crab servo is powered in parallel with 

the stereo servo via the PM and C servo power switch, with two 5.0-ampere 

fuses, in parallel, between the switch and each servo (four fuses total) for 

protection against short circuits. The servos are powered when either 9 OP 

ON or 5 OP ON is commanded. 

G -

Approved for Release: 2017j02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BY EMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

Access Hatch 

COA (-Y Side) 

Figure 3.4-11. Crab Servo 

3.4-19 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

.] 

Handle via BYEMAN 

f,ontrol System On1 y 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-OOS~ W-C-019840-RI-80 

This page intentionally left blank. 

3.4-20 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

~ 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

~...L. 

COMMAND 

PROCESSOR * 

111 

Hand! e vi a BYE.MAN Control System Only 

CP-A j 

--·------- -------1 

TIMER ENABLE/ 

9 

Figure 3.4-12. Crab Servo Subsystem Electrical Block Diagram 

Bl F-008-11'-C-019840-RI-80 

9 OP ON (A) 

9 OP ON (Bl 

9 OP OFF (A) 

9 OP OFF (6) 

\__J--.....::::~==!----1-- 24.5 VDC 

PRIMARY POWER 

>t---;-----1't---- 4671 5 OP ON (A) 

5 OP ON(Bl 

:t---~-----1c----- 4673 5 OP 

'-----><!-~-- 4674 5 OP 

3.4-21/3,4-22 

Te, !l!CIU!T ..lL 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

The crab servo consists of a motor bidrive circuit, a mechanical brush-type 

encoder, a permanent magnet de motor, a time-out protection circuit, and two 

instrumentation potentiometers geared to the output shaft. The servo is commanded to each of its 24 nominal positions by means of a 5-bit binary code 

word. The positions, except for +O and -0, are separated by 236.7 degrees of 

shaft rotation. Three wires are connected between the servo and command processor for each bit. Position command information is supplied to the servo 

by shorting each bit-common lead to either the bit "l" or bit "O" lead by means 

of latching relays in the command processor. Crab position commanding is controlled by the 13V WORD command (9/5 Camera OFF). Bits 27 through 30 

specify the crab angle to be executed. Bit 31 indicates the polarity of the 

desired crab angle, Positioning control logic is based on the need for only 

24 commands of the 32 possible from the 5 variable bits. The remaining 8 

false or incorrect commands will drive the servo to either the extreme clockwise or counterclockwise discrete position, depending on the commanded crab 

polarity (see Table 3.4-2). Upon receipt of a 13V WORD command, the stereo 

servo will move to the position stored by the last 14V WORD, and the crab 

servo will move to the crab angle specified. 

4.2.2.1 Crab Servo Motor Bidrive Circuit. The motor bidrive circuit is a 

standard "H" type drive similar to that used for the stereo servo, with the 

motor in the center of the "H" and an NPN power Darlington transistor acting 

as a switch in each leg. The 2 top transistors in the bridge are self-biased 

on, but do not conduct until an emitter current path is provided by one of 

the bottom transistors. The direction of the motor current is determined by 

which of the lower transistors is on, Information as to which bottom transistor is to be turned on is supplied by a voltage applied to one of 2 lines 

from the encoder. One line goes to the base lead of a driver transistor on 

each bottom side of the "H". The driver circuit turns its associated 

bottom power transistor on and the top one off. When the servo is in a command-satisfied position, there is no voltage on either line and both bottom 

3.4-23 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle. vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.4-2 

CRAB POSITION VS COMMAND BIT STATE 

13V WORD 

Bit 27 Bit 30 Crab Angle Crab Step 

(LSB) Bit 28 Bit 29 (MSB) Bit 31 (Degrees) (Numerical) 

1 1 0 1 1 +3.85 +11 

0 1 0 1 1 +3.50 +10 

1 0 0 1 1 +3,15 + 9 

0 0 0 1 1 +2.80 + 8 

1 1 1 0 1 +2.45 + 7 

0 1 1 0 1 +2.10 + 6 

1 0 1 0 1 +1. 75 + 5 

0 0 1 0 1 +1.40 + 4 

1 1 0 0 1 +1. 05 + 3 

0 1 0 0 1 +0.70 + 2 

1 0 0 0 1 +0,35 + 1 

0 0 0 0 1 + 0 + 0 

0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 

1 0 0 0 0 -0.35 - 1 

0 1 0 0 0 -0.70 - 2 

1 l 0 0 0 -1.05 - 3 

0 0 1 0 0 -1.40 - 4 

1 0 1 0 0 -1.75 - 5 

0 1 1 0 0 -2.10 - 6 

1 1 1 0 0 -2.45 - 7 

0 0 0 1 0 -2.80 - 8 

1 0 0 1 0 -3.15 - 9 

0 l 0 1 0 -3.50 -10 

1 1 0 1 0 -3.85 -11 

Note: Any other combination of bits 27 through 30 (crab bits 4 through 1) will 

drive the crab servo to either the positive or negative extreme, depending 

on the commanded crab polarity. 

3.4-24 

Handle via BYEMAN 

G 

- Control System Only 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

transistors are off. If the mirror drive is mechanically disturbed to such 

an extent that the servo position is moved outside the specified tolerance 

range for its commanded position, it will return to within tolerance without being recommanded, provided servo power is available. The motor terminal voltage is regulated to approximately 18 vdc with zener diodes. 

4.2.2.2 Crab Servo Encoder. The function of the encoder is to compare the 

input binary command with actual shaft position and direct the bidrive circuit to run in the proper direction to satisfy the command. The encoder 

consists of 32 varying length, conductive segment tracks on a cylindrical 

drum. Electrical connection is made to each track by means of conductive 

brushes. This motor-encoder drive method is not a closed-loop system. 

Voltage is lost to the bidrive circuit when a command is satisfied by a 

brush breaking electrical contact with a segment. Coast is controlled by 

dynamic braking of the motor. 

4.2.2.3 Crab Servo Overload Protection. If the servo current (motor plus 

electronics) exceeds approximately 1.4 amperes (overload), a timing circuit 

is activated. This circuit will energize a latching relay within 3.5 to 8.7 

seconds of continuous overload. The latching relay opens the 2 encoder outputs to the bidrive circuit disabling the servo. The timer will automatically reset itself within 0.5 second after current returns to a normal level. 

If the latching relay has been activated by the timer circuit, it must be 

reset manually by reversing the polarity bit or by removing and reapplying 

servo power. 

4.2.3 Crab Angle Instrumentation 

Two lOK~ potentiometers, a coarse and a fine output (IMPs 5009 and 5010, respectively), are connected through gears to the servo output shaft (reference 

Figure 3.4-8). These potentiometers are powered through resistor dividers by 

the +5-volt instrumentation power supply. The fine potentiometer rotates 5 

times for each rotation of the coarse. 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle vi a BYH-1AN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

A second set of instrumentation points (fine IMP 5149 and coarse IMP 5148, 

gear ratio 5:1) act as redundant position monitors. These outputs are derived from potentiometers located in that portion of the load box attached 

to the COA structure (reference Figure 3.4-9). A linkage arm connects the 

load box assembly to the yoke and rotates the potentiometers as a function 

of yoke position. Power is derived from the +15-volt instrumentation power 

supply. 

4.3 Instrumentation Summary 

Table 3.4-3 summarizes those instrumentation points associated with the 

mirror positioning servos. 

4.4 

4.4.1 

Mirror Positioning Command Summary 

CP Select Commands 

CP A SELECT (N02663, N01663, N03663) 

CP B SELECT (N02666, N01666, N03666) 

Function: 

Comments: 

These commands choose the "A Channel" or "B Channel" 

electronics in the command processor for control of 

the crab servo and stereo servo. The commands also 

choose which CP channel will process the 9 OP and 5 

OP commands. 

(a) Both Channel A and Channel B circuits are completely capable of handling all servo and all 

9 and 5 OP commands. They can be used interchangeably. 

(b) Erroneous instrumentation and reverse power 

control logic will result if sides of the 

CP are switched while either 9 or 5 operational power is on. 

3.4-26 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

-

0 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD (.N 

. I\) .+:>- 0 1 ...... N -J 

--

0 " I\) 

--...... 

.+:>-

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

T-UP 5ECRf..T .£.- BIF-008-· W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.4-3 

MIRROR POSITIONING INSTRUMENTATION SUMMARY 

IMP Title 

5009 Crab Angle (Coarse) 

5010 Crab Angle (Fine) 

5148 Crab Angle (Coarse) 

5149 Crab Angle (Fine) 

5127 Stereo Angle 

5147 Stereo Angle 

Handle vi a BYEMAH 

Control System Only 

Description Power 

A coarse and fine potentiometer (ratio 5:1) with associ- +5 vdc 

ated voltage divider networks are located in the crab servo 

and are mechanically connected through gears to the servo 

(see Figure 3.4-8). Voltage output extends 

0.5v to 4.5v, with the fine sensor cycling 

several times over the full range of crab drive. 

fine potentiometer (ratio 5:1) located in +15 vdc 

the load box mounted to the camera optics 

monitor directly the position of the stereo mirror 

means of lever arms and gears (see Figure 3.4-9). 

arrangement provides a redundant means of monitoring 

Associated processing circuitry is located 

of the load box. Voltage output extends 

0.25v to 4.8v, with the fine sensor cycling 

several times over the full range of crab drive. 

within the stereo servo, monitors +5 vdc 

stereo servo output shaft over the range 

of rotation required to establish the three mirror positions 

vertical, aft). The potentiometer is mechanically 

connected through gears to the output shaft (reference 

Figure 3.4-8). Output varies nonlinearly from 0.5v to 4.5v. 

A potentiometer located in that portion of the load box 

mounted to the stereo mirror yoke monitors the stereo 

angle. Linkage arms connect the load box assembly to the 

stereo mirror and rotate the potentiometer as a function of 

stereo position (see Figure 3.4-9). The processing 

network is located in that portion of the load box containing IMPs 5148 and 5149. Output varies nonlinearly from 

0.5v to 4.5v. 

IOP SECRET G 

+15 vdc 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.+:>-

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
TOP SECRET G 

IMP Title 

5090 Crab, Stereo, and Door Current 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Con ystem Onl 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.4-3 (CONT'D) 

Description 

A current sensing resistor in the power return line in 

the PM and C generates a voltage proportional to the 

combined currents for the crab and stereo servos, and the 

viewport door motor and electronics. The signal is amplified within the PM and C to produce a linear output 

ranging from 0.2v (O.O amp) to 5.0v (6.0 amps). 

A two-resistor voltage divider network connected across 

the servo power feed in the PM and C monitors the voltage output level. Output is digitized in the DTU to 

yield a binary signal (Ori/Off). 

"0" = Off 

"l" 

re re of 

command processor monitor commands 

satellite control 0.0v or to 

D/A converter. D/A 

IMP. occurs 

from 0.25v to 4.75v in 0. 

Crab 4-LSB (13V WORD Bit 27) 

Bit = Crab Bit 3 (13V WORD Bit 28) 

Bit = Crab Bit 2 (13V WORD 29) 

Bit (MSB) Crab Bit 1-MSB (13V WORD Bit 30) 

Power 

±15 vdc 

Self 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD +5/±15 vdc co 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

Similar to IMP 5011: +5/±15 vdc 

Bit 1 (LSB) Stereo Drive Transfer Bit 1 (14V WORD Bit 27) 

Bit 2 = Stereo Drive Transfer Bit 2 (14V WORD Bit 28) 

Bit 3 Viewport Door Open/Close 

Bit 4 (MSB) = Crab Polarity +/-

.r 
)> 

"O 

"O 

..., 

0 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD Vl Q) . CJ) _.,. CD I 

I\) N 

0 l.O ...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 

TOP SECRET Q.._ 

IMP Title 

5046 Stereo Bit 1 Stored, 

Stereo Bit 2 Stored, 

CP Select A/B, 

5029 

FPLLE Speed Range High/Normal 

9 Cam ON/OFF, 5 Cam ON/OFF, 

9 OP ON/OFF, 5 OP ON/OFF 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Control System Only 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

TABLE 3.4-3 (CONT'D) 

Description 

Similar to IMP 5011: 

Bit 1 (LSB) = Stereo Bit 1 Stored (14V WORD Bit 27) 

Bit 2 = Stereo Bit 2 Stored (14V WORD Bit 28) 

Bit 3 = CP Select A/B 

Bit 4 (MSB) = FPLLE Speed Range High/Normal 

Similar 

Bit 1 

Bit 2 

Bit 3 

Bit 4 

to IMP 5011: 

(LSB) = 9 Cam ON/OFF 

= 5 Cam ON/OFF 

= 9 OP ON/OFF 

(MSB) = 5 OP ON/OFF 

TOP SECIEt G 

Power 

+5/±15 vdc 

+5/±15 vdc 

)> 

"O 

"O 

a 

< CD 

c. 

O' 

..., 

;:a 

CD 

CD 

Q) 

CJ) 

CD 

I\) 

0 

...... 

-J 

--

0 

I\) 

--...... 

.j:>. 

() 

0 

0'1 

0 

co 

-J 

I\) 

I\) 
4.4.2 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

14V WORD Command 

14V WORD 

Function: 

(14V4bbWXYZ, bits 25 through 38, Implicit) 

Bits 27 and 28 of this command store the stereo position 

to which the stereo mirror servo is to move upon receipt 

of a 13V WORD command. 

This command also commences and terminates photography 

in the 9 and 5 systems. Either system can be operated 

individually or both used simultaneously. 

Only one film-drive speed (FDS) can be held in the CP 

at a given time. This FDS will be used by whichever 

system(s) is (are) operating. The command implicitly 

removes power from the 9 and 5 slit control electronics 

and inhibits both the 9 and the 5 take-ups. 

Bit No. 

Implicit Bit 

25-1 

25-0 

26-1 

26-0 

27-1} 27-0 

28-1 

28-0 

29 } through 

38 

14V WORD Command Bits 

Function 

9/5 Slit OFF, 9/5 Take-up INHIBIT 

9 Film Drive (9 FPLLE) ON, 9 SRC ON, 9 Data 

Track and 9 Interframe Marker ON 

9 Film Drive (9 FPLLE) OFF, 9 SRC OFF, 9 Data 

Track and 9 Interframe Marker OFF 

S Film Drive (S FPLLE) ON, S SRC ON, S Data 

Track and S Interframe Marker ON 

S Film Drive (5 FPLLE) OFF, S SRC OFF, S Data 

Track and S Interframe Marker OFF 

Stereo position for stereo mirror at next 13V 

WORD: 

Mirror Position Stored 

(Degrees) 27 28 

+8.65 (Forward) 0 0 

o.o (Vertical) 0 1 

-8.65 (Aft) 1 0 

-8.65 (Aft) 1 1 

Film-drive speed (LSB to MSB), and also for 

bits 35 through 38, SRC step (LSB to MSB) 

3.4-30 

G 

Handle vi a BY EM AN 

Con tro 1 Sy stem Only 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 
4.4.3 

Interlocks: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

(a) No film motion will occur unless 9 OP ON or 5 OP 

ON is provided for that system in which film drive 

is commanded. The stereo mirror position will be 

stored, however, and the SRC will function for the 

commanded system. 

(b) The 9/5 Take-up INHIBIT will be overridden in a 

system if a low tension condition is encountered or 

if the take-up side of a looper reaches electrically 

full. The 9/5 Take-up INHIBIT will also be overridden by execution of a 9/5 TAKE-UP ENABLE command 

after execution of a 14V WORD. 

Constraints: (a) The film drive requires 0,30 second (nominal) to 

achieve acceptable drive smoothness. 

Comments: 

(b) The SRC mechanism can move a maximum of four steps 

during the film drive start-up period. 

(a) The 14V WORD is the only command which can be used 

to provide the stereo mirror stereo position information to the PPS/DP EAC. 

(b) The 14V WORD is the only command which can be used 

to commence photography in either system. 

13V WORD Command (13V2bWXYZ) 

Function: (a) The stereo servo will move to the position stored 

by the last 14V WORD command and the crab servo 

will move to the crab angle specified. Bits 27 (LSB) 

through 30 (MSB) of the 13V WORD command specify 

the crab angle to be executed. Bit 31 provides 

the polarity of the desired crab angle. 

(b) This command implicitly terminates photography in 

both the 9 and the 5 systems by resetting the 9 

and 5 film-drive command memories to OFF. It 

also removes power from the 9 and 5 SRCs, and the 

9 and 5 data tracks and interframe markers. 

3.4-31 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
4.4.4 

Interlocks: 

Comments: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bit No. 

Implicit Bit: 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

~; } through 

38 

Bl F-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

13V WORD Command Bits 

Function 

9 and 5 Film Drive OFF 

9 and 5 SRCs OFF 

9 and 5 Data Track and Interframe 

Markers OFF 

Stereo Mirror Drive ON 

No Function in PPS/DP 

Crab Angle Bit 4 (LSB) 

Crab Angle Bit 3 

Crab Angle Bit 2 

Crab Angle Bit l (MSB) 

Crab Polarity 

No function in PPS/DP EAC 

See Table 3.4-2 for command bit pattern vs crab angle. 

(a) This command requires either 9 OP ON or 5 OP ON for 

execution of crab and stereo positions. 

(b) The stereo mirror stereo angle position given in the 

last 14V WORD will be executed by this command. 

(a) 3.0 seconds are required for stereo angle transitions between extremes (forward/aft), 2.0 

seconds between adjacent positions (aft/vertical 

or forward/vertical). 

(b) Crab angle transition requires 3.0 seconds for one 

step. Each additional step requires 2.5 seconds. 

(c) Due to system design, it is possible to more accurately achieve a desired crab angle by approaching 

the desired crab step from a certain direction (see 

Section 4.2). 

(d) The 13V WORD is the only command which executes crab 

and stereo mirror changes. 

Operational Power ON Commands 

9 OP ON (Nl2054, Nll054, Nl3054) 5 OP ON (Nl20SS, NllOSS, Nl3055) 

3.4-32 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
4.4.5 

Function: 

Interlocks: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

G 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

The OP ON commands switch camera operating power for 

the indicated camera system. The following units 

receive power when the indicated commands are executed: 

Stereo Servo (9 or 5 OP ON) 

Crab Servo (9 or 5 OP ON) 

9 FPLLE (9 OP ON) 

5 FPLLE (5 OP ON) 

Film Control Electronics (9 OP ON) 

Film Handling Electronics (5 OP ON) 

If 9 SRC DISABLE or 5 SRC DISABLE have disabled an SRC 

mechanism, execution of OP ON for that system will reset 

the disabled SRC allowing power application to the associated SRC, data track, and interframe marker electronics. 

(a) Either the 9 or the 5 operating power must be on for 

execution of crab or stereo angle changes commanded 

by a 13V WORD. 

(b) The OP ON command is required in a camera system to 

permit that system to operate; i.e., 9 OP ON for the 

9 system and 5 OP ON for the 5 system. 

(c) Operational power for a system is required for takeup operation in that camera system. Film take-up 

requires 3.0 seconds (3.5 seconds in the 9 system 

when there is less than 500 feet or more than 4000 

feet of film on the take-up spool, and the drive 

voltage is less than 24.5 vdc). 

(d) 5 OP ON disables the 5 parking brake circuit. 

Operational Power OFF Commands 

9 OP OFF (Nl2050, Nll050, Nl3050) 

5 OP OFF (N12056, N11056, N13056) 

Function: The indicated OP OFF commands remove camera operating 

power f roin -: 

Stereo Servo (9 and 5 OP OFF) 

Crab Servo (9 and 5 OP OFF) 

9 FPLLE (9 OP OFF) 

5 FPLLE (5 OP OFF) 

Film Control Electronics (9 OP OFF) 

Film Handling Electronics (5 OP OFF) 

3.4-33 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

C:Ontrol System Only 
4.4.6 

4.4.7 

Interlocks: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

(a) Either 9 or 5 operational power is required for 

crab and stereo servo power. 

(b) S OP OFF enables the S parking brake circuitry 

if the 5 parking brake power is not on at the 

time of command execution. Otherwise, the 5 

parking brake circuitry will not be enabled 

until both S OP and 5 parking brake power are 

off. 

9/5 RUNOUT ON Command (MCS) 

(MP00046) 

Function: 

Interlocks: 

This command provides power to the: 

Stereo Servo 

Crab Servo 

9 FPLLE 

5 FPLLE 

Film Control Electronics 

Film Handling Electronics 

It selects the normal speed range of film-drive speeds 

and selects "l" for the two most significant film-drive 

speed bits. It turns on the 9 and the S FPLLEs producing film drive in both systems between step 768 (9.70 

in./sec) and step 1023 (11.8 in./sec). 

(a) Runout can be halted by commanding 9 OFF (MN00122) 

and 5 OFF (MN00124) or 9/5 OFF (MN00773). 

(b) Runout can also be negated by the ECS 13V WORD or 

14V WORD commands with 9 OP OFF and 5 OP OFF. 

(c) 9/5 RUNOUT ON disables the 5 parking brake circuitry. 

Power OFF Commands (MCS) 

9 OFF (MN00122) 

5 OFF (MN00124) 

9/5 OFF (MN00773) 

3.4-34 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYH-IAN 

Control System Only 
Function: 

Interlocks: 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

BIF-008- W-C-019840-RI-80 

These commands remove power from the: 

Stereo Servo (9 OFF and 5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

Crab Servo (9 OFF and 5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

Focus Sensor Electronics (9 OFF, 5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

9 FPLLE (9 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

5 FPLLE (5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

Film Control Electronics (9 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

Film Handling Electronics (5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

S-1/PRG (9 OFF, 5 OFF, 9/5 OFF) 

5 OFF or 9/5 OFF enables the 5 parking brake circuitry 

if 5 parking brake power is off at the time of command 

execution. Otherwise, the 5 parking brake circuitry 

will not be enabled until both 5 OP and 5 parking 

brake power are off. 

3.4-35 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEMAN 

Control System Only 
Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Bl F-008-W-C-019840-BI-SQ 

This Page Intentionally Blank 

3.4-36 

G 

Approved for Release: 2017 /02/14 C05097221 

Handle via BYEtvlAN 

Control System Only